Vamp 50, Vamp 52: VAMP 50 Overcurrent and Earthfault Protection Relay VAMP 52 Feeder and Motor Protection Relay

VAMP 50, VAMP 52
VAMP 50 Overcurrent and earthfault protection relay

VAMP 52 Feeder and motor protection relay
Publication version: V50/en M/A018
User Manual
Trace back information:
Workspace Main version a132
Checked in 2017-02-13
Skribenta version 4.6.323
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 General ..................................................................................... 9
1.1 Legal notice ...................................................................... 9
1.2 Safety information and password protection .................... 10
1.3 Relay features .................................................................. 12
1.3.1 User interface ...................................................... 13
1.4 Related documents .......................................................... 13
1.5 Periodical testing .............................................................. 13
1.6 EU directive compliance .................................................. 14
1.7 Abbreviations ................................................................... 14
2 Local panel user interface ...................................................... 16

2.1 Relay front panel .............................................................. 16
2.1.1 Display ................................................................ 18
2.1.2 Adjusting display contrast ................................... 19
2.2 Local panel operations ..................................................... 20
2.2.1 Menu structure of protection functions ................ 23
2.2.2 Setting groups ..................................................... 25
2.2.3 Fault logs ............................................................. 27
2.2.4 Operating levels .................................................. 28
2.3 Operating measures ........................................................ 30
2.3.1 Control functions ................................................. 30
2.3.2 Measured data .................................................... 31
2.3.3 Reading event register ........................................ 32
2.3.4 Forced control (Force) ......................................... 33
2.4 Configuration and parameter setting ............................... 34
2.4.1 Parameter setting ................................................ 35
2.4.2 Setting range limits .............................................. 36
2.4.3 Disturbance recorder menu DR .......................... 36
2.4.4 Configuring digital inputs DI ................................ 37
2.4.5 Configuring digital outputs DO ............................ 38
2.4.6 Configuring analogue outputs AO (Option) ......... 38
2.4.7 Protection menu Prot .......................................... 39
2.4.8 Configuration menu CONF .................................. 39
2.4.9 Protocol menu Bus .............................................. 42
2.4.10 Single line diagram editing .................................. 45
2.4.11 Blocking and Interlocking configuration .............. 45
3 VAMPSET PC software ........................................................... 46

3.1 Folder view ....................................................................... 46
4 Introduction ............................................................................. 48
4.1 Main features ................................................................... 48
4.2 Principles of numerical protection techniques ................. 49
V50/en M/A018 3
Table of Contents
5 Protection functions ............................................................... 51

5.1 Maximum number of protection stages in one
application ........................................................................ 51
5.2 General features of protection stages .............................. 51
5.3 Application modes ............................................................ 56
5.4 Current protection function dependencies ....................... 56
5.5 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51) ..................................... 57
5.5.1 Remote controlled overcurrent scaling ............... 61
5.6 Current unbalance stage I2/I1> (46) in feeder mode ........ 62
5.7 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode ............ 63
5.8 Phase reversal/incorrect phase sequence protection I2>>
(47) ................................................................................... 65
5.9 Stall protection IST> (48) .................................................. 66
5.9.1 Motor status ........................................................ 68
5.10 Frequent start protection N> (66) ..................................... 69
5.11 Undercurrent protection I< (37) ........................................ 72
5.12 Directional earth fault protection I0φ> (67N) ..................... 73
5.13 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N) ................................. 80
5.13.1 Earth fault faulty phase detection algorithm ........ 84
5.14 Intermittent transient earth fault protection I0INT> (67NI) .. 87
5.15 Zero sequence voltage protection U0> (59N) .................. 92
5.16 Thermal overload protection T> (49) ............................... 95
5.17 Single-phase overvoltage protection U> (59) .................. 99
5.18 Single-phase undervoltage protection U< (27) ................ 101
5.19 Magnetishing inrush If2 > (68F2) ...................................... 102
5.20 Transformer over exicitation If5> (68F5) .......................... 104
5.21 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF) ............... 105
5.22 Programmable stages (99) .............................................. 106
5.23 Arc fault protection (optional) ........................................... 109
5.23.1 2S+BIO ................................................................109
5.23.2 3S+BIO ................................................................112
5.24 Inverse time operation ..................................................... 115
5.24.1 Standard inverse delays IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, RI ...117
5.24.2 Free parameterization using IEC, IEEE and IEEE2
equations .............................................................127
5.24.3 Programmable inverse time curves .................... 128
6 Supporting functions .............................................................. 130

6.1 Event log .......................................................................... 130
6.2 Disturbance recorder ....................................................... 132
6.2.1 Running virtual comtrade files ............................. 136
6.3 Cold load pick-up and inrush current detection ............... 137
6.4 Current transformer supervision ...................................... 139
6.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring ................................ 139
6.6 Energy pulse outputs ....................................................... 145
6.7 System clock and synchronization ...................................148
6.8 Running hour counter ...................................................... 154
6.9 Timers .............................................................................. 155
4 V50/en M/A018
Table of Contents
6.10 Combined overcurrent status ...........................................157

6.11 Self-supervision ............................................................... 159
6.11.1 Diagnostics ..........................................................159
7 Measurement functions .......................................................... 161

7.1 Measurement accuracy ....................................................161
7.2 RMS values ......................................................................162
7.3 Harmonics and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) ............. 163
7.4 Demand values ................................................................ 164
7.5 Minimum and maximum values ....................................... 164
7.6 Maximum values of the last 31 days and 12 months ....... 165
7.7 Voltage measurement modes .......................................... 166
7.8 Power calculations ........................................................... 167
7.9 Direction of power and current .........................................169
7.10 Symmetric components ................................................... 170
7.11 Primary secondary and per unit scaling ...........................171
7.11.1 Current scaling .................................................... 171
7.11.2 Voltage scaling .................................................... 174
7.12 Analogue output (option) ..................................................177
7.12.1 mA scaling example ............................................ 177
8 Control functions .................................................................... 178

8.1 Output relays ....................................................................178
8.2 Digital inputs .................................................................... 179
8.3 Virtual inputs and outputs ................................................ 181
8.4 Function keys / F1 & F2 ................................................... 181
8.5 Output matrix ................................................................... 181
8.6 Blocking matrix .................................................................183
8.7 Controllable objects ......................................................... 184
8.7.1 Controlling with DI ............................................... 185
8.7.2 Local/Remote selection ....................................... 186
8.7.3 Controlling with F1 & F2 ...................................... 186
8.8 Auto-reclose function (79) ................................................187
8.9 Logic functions ................................................................. 195
9 Communication and protocols .............................................. 197

9.1 Communication ports ....................................................... 197
9.1.1 Local port (Front panel) ....................................... 198
9.1.2 Remote port ........................................................ 200
9.1.3 Extension port .................................................... 201
9.1.4 Ethernet port ....................................................... 201
9.2 Communication protocols ................................................ 204
9.2.1 PC communication .............................................. 204
9.2.2 Modbus TCP and Modbus RTU .......................... 205
9.2.3 Profibus DP ......................................................... 206
9.2.4 SPA-bus .............................................................. 209
9.2.5 IEC 60870-5-103 ................................................. 210
9.2.6 DNP 3.0 ...............................................................212
V50/en M/A018 5
Table of Contents
9.2.7 IEC 60870-5-101 ................................................. 213

9.2.8 External I/O (Modbus RTU master) .....................214
9.2.9 IEC 61850 ........................................................... 214
9.2.10 EtherNet/IP ..........................................................215
9.2.11 FTP server .......................................................... 215
9.2.12 DeviceNet ............................................................216
10 Application ...............................................................................217
10.1 Substation feeder protection ............................................ 218
10.2 Industrial feeder / motor protection .................................. 220
10.3 Trip circuit supervision ..................................................... 221
10.3.1 Trip circuit supervision with one digital input ....... 221
10.3.2 Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs ..... 227
11 Connections .............................................................................231
11.1 Rear panel ....................................................................... 231
11.2 Auxiliary voltage ...............................................................233
11.3 Output relays ....................................................................234
11.4 Serial communication connection .................................... 234
11.4.1 Front panel USB connector ................................. 234
11.4.2 Pin assignments of the optional communication
interface cards .....................................................235
11.5 Input/output card B = 4 x DI + 1 x DI/DO ......................... 238
11.6 Arc protection card C = Arc (2 x Arc sensor + BIO) ......... 238
11.7 Arc protection card D = Advanced arc (3 x Arc sensor +
BIO) ..................................................................................239
11.8 External option modules .................................................. 240
11.8.1 Third-party external input / output modules ........ 240
11.9 Block optional diagrams ...................................................246
11.9.1 VAMP 50 ............................................................. 246
11.9.2 VAMP 52 ............................................................. 247
11.10 Block diagrams of optional modules ................................ 248
11.11 Connection examples ...................................................... 250
11.11.1 VAMP 50 ............................................................. 250
11.11.2 VAMP 52 ............................................................. 251
12 Technical data ..........................................................................254

12.1 Connections ..................................................................... 254
12.2 Test and environmental conditions .................................. 259
12.3 Protection functions ......................................................... 261
12.3.1 Non-directional current protection ....................... 261
12.3.2 Directional current protection .............................. 267
12.3.3 Frequent start protection ..................................... 267
12.3.4 Voltage protection ............................................... 268
12.3.5 Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF) ...271
12.3.6 Magnetising inrush 68F2 ..................................... 271
12.3.7 Over exicitation 68F5 .......................................... 272
12.3.8 Digital input / output card (option) ....................... 272
6 V50/en M/A018
Table of Contents
12.3.9 Arc fault protection (option) ................................. 273

12.4 Supporting functions ........................................................ 274
13 Mounting .................................................................................. 275
14 Order information ....................................................................277
15 Firmware revision ....................................................................279
V50/en M/A018 7
1 General
1 General
1.1 Legal notice

Copyright
2017 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this document. This document
is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons. This
document gives instructions on device installation, commissioning
and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable
circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the
event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action
without proper authorization. Contact Schneider Electric and request
the necessary information.
Contact information
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
V50/en M/A018 9
1.2 Safety information and password protection 1 General
1.2 Safety information and password

protection
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to
become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate,
service or maintain it. The following special messages may appear
throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential
hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies
a procedure.
10 V50/en M/A018
1 General 1.2 Safety information and password protection
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal
injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential
personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this
symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, can result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical
injury.
User qualification
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and
maintained only by trained and qualified personnel. No responsibility
is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out
of the use of this material. A qualified person is one who has skills
and knowledge related to the construction, installation, and operation
of electrical equipment and has received safety training to recognize
and avoid the hazards involved.
Password protection
Use IED's password protection feature in order to protect untrained
person interacting this device.
V50/en M/A018 11
1.3 Relay features 1 General
WARNING
WORKING ON ENERGIZED EQUIPMENT
Do not choose lower Personal Protection Equipment while
working on energized equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or
serious injury.
1.3 Relay features

The comprehensive protection functions of the relay make it ideal
for utility, industrial, marine and off-shore power distribution
applications. The relay features the following protection functions.
Table 1.1: List of protection functions
IEEE/ANSI code IEC symbol Function name
27 U<, U<<, U<<< Single-phase undervoltage protection ***
37 I< Undercurrent protection (Only VAMP52)
46 I2 / I1 > Current unbalance protection in feeder mode
46 I2> Current unbalance protection in motor mode *
47 I2>> Phase reversal / incorrect phase sequence protection *
48 IST> Stall protection *
49 T> Thermal overload protection
50/51 I>, I>>, I>>> Overcurrent protection
50ARC/ 50NARC ArcI>, ArcI0> Optional arc fault protection (with an external module)
50BF CBFP Circuit-breaker failure protection
50N/51N I0>, I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>> Earth fault protection
59 U>, U>>, U>>> Single-phase overvoltage protection ***
59N U0>, U0>> Zero sequence voltage protection **
66 N> Frequent start protection *
67N I0φ>, I0φ>> Directional earth-fault, low-set stage, sensitive, definite or inverse
time (can be used as non directional)**
67NI I0INT> Intermittent transient earth fault protection **
68F2 If2> Magnetishing inrush
68F5 If5> Transfomer overexitation
79 AR Auto-reclosing
99 Prg1 – 8 Programmable stages (Only VAMP52)
* Only VAMP 52 available when application option is in motor protection mode.

** Only VAMP 52 available when measurement option is U0
*** Only VAMP 52 available when measurement option is 1LL (line-to-line voltage) or
1LN (phase-to-neutral voltage).
Further the relay includes a disturbance recorder. Arc protection is

optionally available.
12 V50/en M/A018
1 General 1.4 Related documents
The relay communicates with other systems using common protocols,

such as the Modbus RTU, ModbusTCP, Profibus DP, IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 61850, SPA bus, Ethernet / IP
and DNP 3.0.
1.3.1 User interface

The relay can be controlled in three ways:
• Locally with the push-buttons on the relay front panel
• Locally using a PC connected to the USB port on the front
• Via remote control over the optional remote control port on the
relay rear panel.
1.4 Related documents

Document Identification*)
VAMP Relay Mounting and Commissioning Instructions VRELAY_MC_xxxx
VAMPSET Setting and Configuration Tool User Manual VVAMPSET_EN_M_xxxx
*) xxxx = revision number

Download the latest software and manual at
www.schneider-electric.com/vamp-protection or m.vamp.fi.
1.5 Periodical testing

The protection IED, cabling and arc sensors must periodically be
tested according to the end-user's safety instructions, national safety
instructions or law. Manufacturer recommends functional testing
being carried minimum every five (5) years.
It is proposed that the periodic testing is conducted with a secondary
injection principle for those protection stages which are used in the
IED and its related units.
V50/en M/A018 13
1.6 EU directive compliance 1 General
1.6 EU directive compliance

EMC compliance
2014/30/EU
Compliance with the European Commission's EMC Directive. Product

Specific Standards were used to establish conformity:
• EN 60255-26: 2013
Product safety
2014/35/EU
Compliance with the European Commission's Low Voltage Directive.

Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety
standards:
• EN60255-27:2014
1.7 Abbreviations
ANSI American National Standards Institute. A standardization organisation.
CB Circuit breaker
CBFP Circuit breaker failure protection
cosφ Active power divided by apparent power = P/S. (See power factor PF). Negative sign indicates reverse
power.
CT Current transformer
CTPRI Nominal primary value of current transformer
CTSEC Nominal secondary value of current transformer
Dead band See hysteresis.
DI Digital input
DO Digital output, output relay
Document file Stores information about the IED settings, events and fault logs.
DSR Data set ready. An RS232 signal. Input in front panel port of VAMP relays to disable rear panel local
port.
DST Daylight saving time. Adjusting the official local time forward by one hour for summer time.
DTR Data terminal ready. An RS232 signal. Output and always true (+8 Vdc) in front panel port of VAMP
relays.
FFT Fast Fourier transform. Algorithm to convert time domain signals to frequency domain or to phasors.
FPGA Field-programmable gate array
HMI Human-machine interface
Hysteresis I.e. dead band. Used to avoid oscillation when comparing two near by values.
IMODE Nominal current of the selected mode. In feeder mode, IMODE= VTPRIMARY. In motor mode, IMODE= IMOT.
IMOT Nominal current of the protected motor
IN Nominal current. Rating of CT primary or secondary.
14 V50/en M/A018
1 General 1.7 Abbreviations
ISET Another name for pick up setting value I>

I0N Nominal current of I0 input in general
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission. An international standardization organisation.
IEC-101 Abbreviation for communication protocol defined in standard IEC 60870-5-101
IEC-103 Abbreviation for communication protocol defined in standard IEC 60870-5-103
IED Intelligent electronic device
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
LAN Local area network. Ethernet based network for computers and IEDs.
Latching Output relays and indication LEDs can be latched, which means that they are not released when the
control signal is releasing. Releasing of latched devices is done with a separate action.
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light-emitting diode
Local HMI IED front panel with display and push-buttons
NTP Network Time Protocol for LAN and WWW
P Active power. Unit = [W]
PF Power factor. The absolute value is equal to cosφ, but the sign is '+' for inductive i.e. lagging current
and '-' for capacitive i.e. leading current.
PM Nominal power of the prime mover. (Used by reverse/under power protection.)
PT See VT
pu Per unit. Depending of the context the per unit refers to any nominal value. For example for overcurrent
setting 1 pu = 1 x IMODE.
Q Reactive power. Unit = [var] acc. IEC
RMS Root mean square
S Apparent power. Unit = [VA]
SF IED status inoperative
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol for LAN and WWW
TCS Trip circuit supervision
THD Total harmonic distortion
U0SEC Voltage at input Uc at zero ohm ground fault. (Used in voltage measurement mode “2LL+U0”)
UA Voltage input for U12 or UL1 depending of the voltage measurement mode
UB Voltage input for U23 or UL2 depending of the voltage measurement mode
UC Voltage input for U31 or U0 depending of the voltage measurement mode
UN Nominal voltage. Rating of VT primary or secondary
UTC Coordinated Universal Time (used to be called GMT = Greenwich Mean Time)
VAMPSET Configuration tool for VAMP protection devices
Webset http configuration interface
VT Voltage transformer i.e. potential transformer PT
VTPRI Nominal primary value of voltage transformer
VTSEC Nominal secondary value of voltage transformer
V50/en M/A018 15
2 Local panel user interface
2 Local panel user interface
2.1 Relay front panel

The figure below shows, as an example, the front panel of the device
and the location of the user interface elements used for local control.
1. Navigation push-buttons
2. LED indicators
3. LCD
4. Local port
Navigation push-button function

CANCEL push-button for returning to the previous menu. To return to the first menu item in the main
menu, press the button for at least three seconds.
INFO push-button for viewing additional information, for entering the password view and for adjusting
the LCD contrast.
programmable function push-button. As default F1 toggles Virtual Input 1 (VI1) On/Off
programmable function push-button. As default F2 toggles Virtual Input 2 (VI2) On/Off
ENTER push-button for activating or confirming a function.
arrow UP navigation push-button for moving up in the menu or increasing a numerical value.
arrow DOWN navigation push-button for moving down in the menu or decreasing a numerical value.
arrow LEFT navigation push-button for moving backwards in a parallel menu or selecting a digit in a
numerical value.
arrow RIGHT navigation push-button for moving forwards in a parallel menu or selecting a digit in a
numerical value.
16 V50/en M/A018
2 Local panel user interface 2.1 Relay front panel
LED indicators
The LEDs on the local HMI can be configured in VAMPSET. To
customise the LED texts on the local HMI, the texts can be written
on a template and then printed on a transparency. The transparencies
can be placed to the pockets beside the LEDs.
LED indicator Meaning Measure/ Remarks
Power LED lit The auxiliary power has been switched on Normal operation state
Status LED lit Internal fault, operates in parallel with the self su- The relay attempts to reboot [RE-
pervision output relay BOOT]. If the error LED remains lit,
call for maintenance.
A- H LED lit Application-related status indicators. Configurable
F1 / F2 LED lit Corresponding function key pressed / activated Depending of function programmed to
F1 / F2
Adjusting LCD contrast

1.
On the local HMI, push and .
2. Enter the four-digit password and push .
3.
Push and adjust the contrast.
• To increase the contrast, push .
• To decrease the contrast, push .
4.
To return to the main menu, push .
Resetting latched indicators and output relays
All the indicators and output relays can be given a latching function
in the configuration.
There are several ways to reset latched indicators and relays:
• From the alarm list, move back to the initial display by pushing
for approx. 3s. Then reset the latched indicators and output
relays by pushing .
• Acknowledge each event in the alarm list one by one by pushing
equivalent times. Then, in the initial display, reset the latched
indicators and output relays by pushing .
The latched indicators and relays can also be reset via a remote
communication bus or via a digital input configured for that purpose.
V50/en M/A018 17
2.1 Relay front panel 2 Local panel user interface
2.1.1 Display
The relay is provided with a backlighted 128x64 LCD dot matrix
display. The display enables showing 21 characters is one row and
eight rows at the same time. The display has two different purposes:
one is to show the single line diagram of the relay with the object
status, measurement values, identification etc (Figure 2.1). The other
purpose is to show the configuration and parameterization values of
the relay (Figure 2.2).
Figure 2.1: Sections of the LCD dot matrix display
1. Freely configurable single-line diagram

2. Controllable objects (max six objects)
3. Object status (max eight objects, including the six controllable
objects)
4. Bay identification
5. Local/Remote selection
6. Auto-reclose on/off selection (if applicable)
7. Freely selectable measurement values (max. six values)
Figure 2.2: Sections of the LCD dot matrix display
1. Main menu column

2. The heading of the active menu
3. The cursor of the main menu
4. Possible navigating directions (push buttons)
5. Measured/setting parameter
6. Measured/set value
18 V50/en M/A018
2 Local panel user interface 2.1 Relay front panel
Backlight control
Display backlight can be switched on with a digital input, virtual input
or virtual output. LOCALPANEL CONF/Display backlight ctrl setting
is used for selecting trigger input for backlight control. When the
selected input activates (rising edge), display backlight is set on for
60 minutes.
2.1.2 Adjusting display contrast

The readability of the LCD varies with the brightness and the
temperature of the environment. The contrast of the display can be
adjusted via the PC user interface, see Chapter 3 VAMPSET PC
software.
V50/en M/A018 19
2.2 Local panel operations 2 Local panel user interface
2.2 Local panel operations

The front panel can be used to control objects, change the local/
remote status, read the measured values, set parameters, and to
configure relay functions. Some parameters, however, can only be
set by means of a PC connected to the local communication port.
Some parameters are factory-set.
Moving in the menus
Main menu Submenus
Prot protection enabling
OK
I pick-up setting
OK OK
moving in the menus_relay
Figure 2.3: Moving in the menus using local HMI
• To move in the main menu, push or .

• To move in submenus, push or .
• To enter a submenu, push and use or for moving
down or up in the menu.
•
To edit a parameter value, push and .
•
To go back to the previous menu, push .
•
To go back to the first menu item in the main menu, push
for at least three seconds.
NOTE: To enter the parameter edit mode, give the password. When the
value is in edit mode, its background is dark.
20 V50/en M/A018
2 Local panel user interface 2.2 Local panel operations
Main menu
The menu is dependent on the user’s configuration and the options
according the order code. For example only the enabled protection
stages will appear in the menu.
A list of the local main menu

Main menu Number of menus Description ANSI code Note
1 Interactive mimic display 1
5 Double size measurements defined by the user 1
1 Title screen with device name, time and firmware
version.
Meas 14 Measurements
Imax 5 Time stamped min & max of currents
Month 17 Maximum values of the last 31 days and the last
twelve months
Evnt 2 Events
DR 3 Disturbance recorder 2
Runh 2 Running hour counter. Active time of a selected
digital input and time stamps of the latest start and
stop.
TIMR 6 Day and week timers
DI 5 Digital inputs including virtual inputs
DO 4 Digital outputs (relays) and output matrix
AO 2 Visible only when AO card installed
Prot 9 Protection counters, combined overcurrent status,
protection status, protection enabling, cold load
and inrush detectionIf2> and block matrix
MSTAT 1 Motor status
N> 4 Frequent start 66 4
I> 5 1st overcurrent stage 50/51 4
I>> 3 2nd overcurrent stage 50/51 4
I>>> 3 3rd overcurrent stage 50/51 4
Ist> 3 Stall protection stage 48 4
I< 3 Undercurrent stage 37 4
I2> 3 Current unbalance stage 46 4
I2>> 3 Phase reversal / incorrect phase sequence stage 47 4
T> 3 Thermal overload stage 49 4
If2> 3 Second harmonic O/C stage 51F2 4
Io> 5 1st earth fault stage 50N/51N 4
Io>> 3 2nd earth fault stage 50N/51N 4
Io>>> 3 3rd earth fault stage 50N/51N 4
Io>>>> 3 4th earth fault stage 50N/51N 4
Ioφ > 6 1st directional earth fault stage 67N 4
Ioφ >> 7 2nd directional earth fault stage 67N 4
Ioint> 4 Transient intermittent E/F 67NI 4
V50/en M/A018 21
Main menu Number of menus Description ANSI code Note

Uo> 3 1st residual overvoltage stage 59N 4
Uo>> 3 2nd residual overvoltage stage 59N 4
Prg1 3 1st programmable stage 4
Prg2 3 2nd programmable stage 4
Prg3 3 3rd programmable stage 4
Prg4 3 4th programmable stage 4
CBFP 3 Circuit breaker failure protection 50BF 4
CBWE 5 Circuit breaker wearing supervision 4
CTSV 1 CT supervisor 4
ArcI> 11 Optional arc protection stage for phase-to-phase 50ARC 4
faults and delayed light signal.
ArcIo> 10 Optional arc protection stage for earth faults. Cur- 50NARC 4
rent input = I0
AR 4 Auto-reclose 79 8
OBJ 11 Object definitions 5
Lgic 2 Status and counters of user’s logic 1
CONF 9 Device setup, scaling etc. 6
Bus 11 Serial port and protocol configuration 7
OPT 1 Option cards
Diag 9 Device selfdiagnosis
Notes
1. Configuration is done with VAMPSET
2. Recording files are read with VAMPSET
3. The menu is visible only if protocol "ExternalIO" is selected for one of the serial ports.
Serial ports are configured in menu "Bus".
4. The menu is visible only if the stage is enabled.
5. Objects are circuit breakers, disconnectors etc.
6. There are two extra menus, which are visible only if the access level "operator" or
"configurator" has been opened with the corresponding password.
7. Detailed protocol configuration is done with VAMPSET.
8. VAMP52
22 V50/en M/A018
2.2.1 Menu structure of protection functions

The general structure of all protection function menus is similar
although the details do differ from stage to stage. As an example the
details of the second overcurrent stage I>> menus are shown below.
I>> STATUS 50 / 51
ExDO Status -
Prot SCntr 5
I> TCntr 2
I>> SetGrp 1
Iv> SGrpDI -
I > Force OFF
Figure 2.4: First menu of I>> 50/51 stage
This is the status, start and trip counter and setting group menu.
• Status –
The stage is not detecting any fault at the moment. The stage
can also be forced to pick-up or trip is the operating level is
“Configurator” and the force flag below is on. Operating levels
are explained in Chapter 2.2.4 Operating levels.
• SCntr 5
The stage has picked-up a fault five times since the last reset or
restart. This value can be cleared if the operating level is at least
“Operator”.
• TCntr 2
The stage has tripped two times since the last reset or restart.
This value can be cleared if the operating level is at least
“Operator”.
• SetGrp 1
The active setting group is one. This value can be edited if the
operating level is at least “Operator”. Setting groups are explained
in Chapter 2.2.2 Setting groups
• SGrpDI –
The setting group is not controlled by any digital input. This value
can be edited if the operating level is at least “Configurator”.
• Force Off
The status forcing and output relay forcing is disabled. This force
flag status can be set to “On” or back to “Off” if the operating
level is at least “Configurator”. If no front panel button is pressed
within five minutes and there is no VAMPSET communication,
the force flag will be set to “Off” position. The forcing is explained
in Chapter 2.3.4 Forced control (Force).
V50/en M/A018 23
I>> SET 50 / 51
Stage setting group 1
ExDI ILmax 403A
ExDO Status -
Prot I>> 1013A
I>> I>> 2.50xIn
CBWE t>> 0.60s
OBJ
Figure 2.5: Second menu(next on the right) of I>> 50/51 stage
This is the main setting menu.

• Stage setting group 1
These are the group 1 setting values. The other setting group
can be seen by pressing push buttons and then or .
Setting groups are explained in Chapter 2.2.2 Setting groups.
• ILmax 403A
The maximum of three measured phase currents is at the
moment 403 A. This is the value the stage is supervising.
• Status –
Status of the stage. This is just a copy of the status value in the
first menu.
• I>> 1013 A
The pick-up limit is 1013 A in primary value.
• I>> 2.50 x IN
The pick-up limit is 2.50 times the rated current of the generator.
This value can be edited if the operating level is at least
“Operator”. Operating levels are explained in Chapter 2.2.4
Operating levels.
• t>> 0.60s
The total operation delay is set to 600 ms. This value can be
edited if the operating level is at least “Operator”.
24 V50/en M/A018
I>> LOG 50/51

FAULT LOG 1
ExDI 2006-09-14
ExDO 12:25:10.288
Prot Type 1-2
I>> Flt 2.86xIn
CBWE Load 0.99xIn
OBJ EDly 81%
SetGrp 1
Figure 2.6: Third and last menu (next on the right) of I>> 50/51 stage
This is the menu for registered values by the I>> stage. Fault logs
are explained in Chapter 2.2.3 Fault logs.
• FAULT LOG 1
This is the latest of the eight available logs. You may move
between the logs by pressing push buttons and then
or .
• 2006-09-14
Date of the log.
• 12:25:10.288
Time of the log.
• Type 1-2
The overcurrent fault has been detected in phases L1 and L2 (A
& B, red & yellow, R/S, u&v).
• Flt 2.86 x IN
The fault current has been 2.86 per unit.
• Load 0.99 x IN
The average load current before the fault has been 0.99 pu.
• EDly 81%
The elapsed operation delay has been 81% of the setting 0.60
s = 0.49 s. Any registered elapsed delay less than 100 % means
that the stage has not tripped, because the fault duration has
been shorter that the delay setting.
• SetGrp 1
The setting group has been 1. This line can be reached by
pressing and several times .
2.2.2 Setting groups

Most of the protection functions of the relay have four setting groups.
These groups are useful for example when the network topology is
changed frequently. The active group can be changed by a digital
V50/en M/A018 25
input, through remote communication or locally by using the local

panel.
The active setting group of each protection function can be selected
separately. Figure 2.7 shows an example where the changing of the
I> setting group is handled with digital input one (SGrpDI). If the
digital input is TRUE, the active setting group is group two and
correspondingly, the active group is group one, if the digital input is
FALSE. If no digital input is selected (SGrpDI = -), the active group
can be selected by changing the value of the parameter SetGrp.
Figure 2.7: Example of protection submenu with setting group parameters
The changing of the setting parameters can be done easily. When

the desired submenu has been found (with the arrow keys), press
to select the submenu. Now the selected setting group is
indicated in the down-left corner of the display (See Figure 2.8). Set1
is setting group one and Set2 is setting group two. When the needed
changes, to the selected setting group, have been done, press
or to select another group ( is used when the active setting
group is 2 and is used when the active setting group is 1).
Figure 2.8: Example of I> setting submenu
26 V50/en M/A018
2.2.3 Fault logs

All the protection functions include fault logs. The fault log of a
function can register up to eight different faults with time stamp
information, fault values etc. The fault logs are stored in non-volatile
memory. Each function has its own logs. The fault logs are not
cleared when power is switched off. The user is able to clear all logs
using VAMPSET. Each function has its own logs (Figure 2.9).
Figure 2.9: Example of fault log
To see the values of, for example, log two, press then to select
the current log (log one). The current log number is then indicated
in the down-left corner of the display (SeeFigure 2.10, Log2 = log
two). The log two is selected by pressing once.
Figure 2.10: Example of selected fault log
V50/en M/A018 27
2.2.4 Operating levels

The relay has three operating levels: User level, Operator level
and Configurator level. The purpose of the access levels is to
prevent accidental change of relay configurations, parameters or
settings.
USER level
Use: Possible to read e.g. parameter values, measurements and events
Opening: Level permanently open
Closing: Closing not possible
OPERATOR level
Use: Possible to control objects and to change e.g. the settings of the
protection stages
Opening: Default password is 1
Setting state:
Push
Closing: The level is automatically closed after 10 minutes idle time. Giving
the password 9999 can also close the level.
CONFIGURATOR level
Use: The configurator level is needed during the commissioning of the
relay. E.g. the scaling of the voltage and current transformers can
be set.
Opening: Default password is 2
Setting state:
Push
Closing: The level is automatically closed after 10 minutes idle time. Giving
the password 9999 can also close the level.
28 V50/en M/A018
Opening access
1.
Push and on the front panel
ENTER PASSWORD
*** 0
Figure 2.11: Opening the access level
2. Enter the password needed for the desired level: the password
can contain four digits. The digits are supplied one by one by
first moving to the position of the digit using and then setting
the desired digit value using .
3. Push .
Password handling
The passwords can only be changed using VAMPSET software
connected to the USB -port in front of the relay.
It is possible to restore the password(s) in case the password is lost
or forgotten. In order to restore the password(s), a relay program is
needed. The virtual serial port settings are 38400 bps, 8 data bits,
no parity and one stop bit. The bit rate is configurable via the front
panel.
Command Description
get pwd_break Get the break code (Example: 6569403)
get serno Get the serial number of the relay (Example: 12345)
Send both the numbers to your nearest Schneider Electric Customer

Care Centre and ask for a password break. A device specific break
code is sent back to you. That code will be valid for the next two
weeks.
Command Description
set pwd_break=4435876 Restore the factory default passwords (“4435876” is just an
example. The actual code should be asked from your nearest
Schneider Electric Customer Care Centre.)
Now the passwords are restored to the default values (See

Chapter 2.2.4 Operating levels ).
V50/en M/A018 29
2.3 Operating measures 2 Local panel user interface
2.3 Operating measures
2.3.1 Control functions

The default display of the local panel is a single-line diagram including
relay identification, Local/Remote indication, Auto-reclose on/off
selection and selected analogue measurement values.
Please note that the operator password must be active in order to
be able to control the objects. Please refer to Chapter 2.2.4 Operating
levels.
Toggling Local/Remote control
1. Push . The previously activated object starts to blink.
2. Select the Local/Remote object (“L” or “R” squared) by using
arrow keys.
3. Push . The L/R dialog opens. Select “REMOTE” to enable
remote control and disable local control. Select “LOCAL” to
enable local control and disable remote control.
4. Confirm the setting by pushing . The Local/Remote state will
change.
Object control
- Using and /
2. Select the object to control by using arrow keys. Please note that
only controllable objects can be selected.
3. Push . A control dialog opens.
4. Select the “Open” or “Close” command by using the or .
5. Confirm the operation by pushing . The state of the object
changes.
- Using & in object control mode

1.
Push or . Object assigned to the key starts to blink and a
control dialog opens.
2. Confirm the operation by pushing .
Toggling virtual inputs
2. Select the virtual input object (empty or black square)
30 V50/en M/A018
2 Local panel user interface 2.3 Operating measures
3. The dialog opens

4. Select “VIon” to activate the virtual input or select “VIoff” to
deactivate the virtual input
2.3.2 Measured data

The measured values can be read from the Meas menu and its
submenus. Furthermore, any measurement value in the following
table can be displayed on the main view next to the single line
diagram. Up to six measurements can be shown.
Value Menu/Submenu Description
IL1 MEAS/PHASE CURRENTS Phase current IL1 [A]
IL1da MEAS/PHASE CURRENTS 15 min average for IL1 [A]
Io MEAS /SYMMETRIC CURRENTS Primary value of zerosequence/ residual current Io [A]
IoC MEAS /SYMMETRIC CURRENTS Calculated Io [A]
I1 MEAS /SYMMETRIC CURRENTS Positive sequence current [A]
I2 MEAS /SYMMETRIC CURRENTS Negative sequence current [A]
I2/I1 MEAS /SYMMETRIC CURRENTS Negative sequence current related to positive sequence current (for
unbalance protection) [%]
Uo MEAS/MISCELLANEOUS Residual voltage Uo [%] (Only in VAMP52)
f MEAS/MISCELLANEOUS Frequency [Hz]
AngDiag MEAS/ANGEE DIAGRAM Phasors
THDIL MEAS /HARM. DISTORTION Total harmonic distortion of the mean value of phase currents [%]
THDIL1 MEAS /HARM. DISTORTION Total harmonic distortion of phase current IL1 [%]
IL1har MEAS/HARMONICS of IL1 Harmonics of phase current IL1 [%]
IL1 wave MEAS/IL1 WAVEFORM Waveform of IL1
IL1 avg MEAS/IL1 AVERAGE 10 min average of IL1
V50/en M/A018 31
2.3 Operating measures 2 Local panel user interface
Figure 2.12: Example of harmonics bar display
2.3.3 Reading event register

The event register can be read from the Evnt submenu:
1. Push once.
2. The EVENT LIST appears. The display contains a list of all the
events that have been configured to be included in the event
register.
Figure 2.13: Example of an event register
3. Scroll through the event list with the and .

4. Exit the event list by pushing .
It is possible to set the order in which the events are sorted. If the
“Order” -parameter is set to “New-Old”, then the first event in the
EVENT LIST is the most recent event.
32 V50/en M/A018
2 Local panel user interface 2.3 Operating measures
2.3.4 Forced control (Force)

In some menus it is possible to switch a function on and off by using
a force function. This feature can be used, for instance, for testing
a certain function. The force function can be activated as follows:
1. Open access level Configurator.
2. Move to the setting state of the desired function, for example DO
(see Chapter 2.4 Configuration and parameter setting).
3. Select the Force function (the background color of the force text
is black).
Figure 2.14: Selecting Force function
4. Push .
5. Push the or to change the "OFF" text to "ON", that is,
to activate the Force function.
6. Push to return to the selection list. Choose the signal to be
controlled by force with the and , for instance the T1
signal.
7. Push to confirm the selection. Signal T1 can now be
controlled by force.
8. Push the or to change the selection from "0" (not alert)
to "1" (alert) or vice versa.
9. Push to execute the forced control operation of the selected
function, e.g., making the output relay of T1 to pick up.
10. Repeat the steps 7 and 8 to alternate between the on and off
state of the function.
11. Repeat the steps 1 – 4 to exit the Force function.
12.
Push to return to the main menu.
NOTE: All the interlockings and blockings are bypassed when the force
control is used.
V50/en M/A018 33
2.4 Configuration and parameter setting 2 Local panel user interface
2.4 Configuration and parameter setting

The minimum procedure to configure a device is
1. Open the access level "Configurator". The default password for
configurator access level is 2.
2. Set the rated values in menu [CONF] including at least current
transformers, voltage transformers and motor ratings if applicable.
Also the date and time settings are in this same main menu.
3. Enable the needed protection functions and disable the rest of
the protection functions in main menu [Prot].
4. Set the setting parameter of the enable protection stages
according the application.
5. Connect the output relays to the start and trip signals of the
enabled protection stages using the output matrix. This can be
done in main menu [DO], although the VAMPSET program is
recommended for output matrix editing.
6. Configure the needed digital inputs in main menu [DI].
7. Configure blocking and interlockings for protection stages using
the block matrix. This can be done in main menu [Prot], although
VAMPSET is recommended for block matrix editing.
Some of the parameters can only be changed via the USB-port using
the VAMPSET software. Such parameters, (for example passwords,
blockings and mimic configuration) are normally set only during
commissioning.
Some of the parameters require the restarting of the relay. This
restarting is done automatically when necessary. If a parameter
change requiresrestarting, the display will show as Figure 2.15
Figure 2.15: Example of auto-reset display
Press to return to the setting view. If a parameter must be

changed, press again. The parameter can now be set. When
the parameter change is confirmed with , a [RESTART]- text
appears to the top-right corner of the display. This means that
auto-resetting is pending. If no key is pressed, the auto-reset will be
executed within few seconds.
34 V50/en M/A018
2 Local panel user interface 2.4 Configuration and parameter setting
2.4.1 Parameter setting

1. Move to the setting state of the desired menu (for example
CONF/CURRENT SCALING) by pushing . The Pick text
appears in the upper-left part of the display.
2. Enter the password associated with the configuration level by
pushing and then using the arrow keys and (default

value is 0002). For more information about the access levels,
please refer to Chapter 2.2.3 Fault logs.
3. Scroll through the parameters using the and .A
parameter can be set if the background color of the line is black.
If the parameter cannot be set the parameter is framed.
4. Select the desired parameter (for example Inom) with .
5. Use the and keys to change a parameter value. If the
value contains more than one digit, use the and keys
to shift from digit to digit, and the and keys to change
the digits.
6. Push to accept a new value. If you want to leave the
parameter value unchanged, exit the edit state by pushing .
VAMP 50 series changing parameters
Figure 2.16: Changing parameters
V50/en M/A018 35
2.4.2 Setting range limits

If the given parameter setting values are out-of-range values, a fault
message will be shown when the setting is confirmed with .
Adjust the setting to be within the allowed range.
Figure 2.17: Example of a fault message
The allowed setting range is shown in the display in the setting mode.
To view the range, push . Push to return to the setting mode.
Figure 2.18: Allowed setting ranges show in the display
2.4.3 Disturbance recorder menu DR

Via the submenus of the disturbance recorder menu the following
functions and features can be read and set:
Disturbance settings
1. Manual trigger (ManTrg)
2. Status (Status)
3. Clear oldest record (Clear)
4. Clear all records (ClrAll)
5. Recording completion (Stored)
6. Count of ready records (ReadyRec)
36 V50/en M/A018
Recorder settings
1. Manual trigger (ManTrig)
2. Sample rate (SR)
3. Recording time (Time)
4. Pre trig time (PreTrig)
5. Mximum time (MaxLen)
6. Count of ready records (ReadyRec)
Rec. channels
• Add a link to the recorder (AddCh)
• Clear all links (ClrCh)
Available links
• DO, DI
• IL
• I2/In, I2/I1, I2, I1, IoCalc
• f
• Io
• IL3, IL2, IL1
• THDIL1, THDIL2, THDIL3
• IL1RMS, IL2RMS, IL3RMS
• ILmin
• ILmax
• T
• Uo, U12 or UL1 depending on the voltage measurement mode.
(VAMP 52 only)
2.4.4 Configuring digital inputs DI

The following functions can be read and set via the submenus of the
digital inputs menu:
1. The status of digital inputs (DIGITAL INPUTS 1, 2)
2. Operation counters (DI COUNTERS)
3. Operation delay (DELAYs for DigIn)
4. The polarity of the input signal (INPUT POLARITY). Either
normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) circuit.
5. Event enabling EVENT MASK1
V50/en M/A018 37
2.4.5 Configuring digital outputs DO

digital outputs menu:
• The status of the output relays (RELAY OUTPUTS1 and 2)
• The forcing of the output relays (RELAY OUTPUTS1 and 2) (only
if Force = ON):
- Forced control (0 or 1) of the Trip relays
- Forced control (0 or 1) of the Alarm relays
- Forced control (0 or 1) of the SF relay
• The configuration of the output signals to the output relays. The
configuration of the operation indicators (LED) Alarm and Trip
and application specific alarm leds A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H (that
is, the output relay matrix).
NOTE: The amount of Trip and Alarm relays depends on the relay type and
optional hardware.
2.4.6 Configuring analogue outputs AO (Option)

Via the submenus of the analogue output menu the following
functions can be read and set:
Analog output
• Value of AO1 (AO1)
• Forced control of analogue output (Force)
Analog output 1 – 4
• Value linked to the analogue output (Lnk1)
• (See list available links)
• Scaled minimum of linked value (Min)
• Scaled maximum of linked value (Max)
• Scaled minimum of analogue output (AOmin)
• Scaled maximum of analogue output (AOmax)
• Value of analogue output (AO1)
38 V50/en M/A018
Available links:
• IL1, IL2, IL2
• F
• IL
• Io, IoCalc
• U12
• UL1
2.4.7 Protection menu Prot

Prot menu:
1. Reset all the counters (PROTECTION SET/ClAll)
2. Read the status of all the protection functions (PROTECT
STATUS 1 – x)
3. Enable and disable protection functions (ENABLED STAGES 1
– x)
4. Define the interlockings using block matrix (only with VAMPSET)
Each stage of the protection functions can be disabled or enabled
individually in the Prot menu. When a stage is enabled, it will be in
operation immediately without a need to reset the relay.
The relay includes several protection functions. However, the
processor capacity limits the number of protection functions that can
be active at the same time.
2.4.8 Configuration menu CONF

The following functions and features can be read and set via the
submenus of the configuration menu:
Device setup
• Bit rate for the command line interface in communication ports
and the USB-port in the front panel. The front panel is always
using this setting. If SPABUS is selected for the rear panel port,
the bit rate is according SPABUS settings.
• Access level [Acc]
• PC access level [PCAcc]
Language
• List of available languages in the relay
V50/en M/A018 39
Current scaling
• Rated phase CT primary current (Inom)
• Rated phase CT secondary current (Isec)
• Rated input of the relay [Iinput] is 5 A
• Rated value of I0 CT primary current (Ionom)
• Rated value of I0 CT secondary current (Iosec)
• Rated I0 input of the relay [Ioinp] is 1 A / 5 A or 0.2 A / 1 A. This
is specified in the order code of the device.
The rated input values are usually equal to the rated secondary value
of the CT.
The rated CT secondary may be greater than the rated input but the
continuous current must be less than four times the rated input. In
compensated, high impedance earthed and isolated networks using
cable transformer to measure residual current I0, it is quite usual to
use a relay with 1 A or 0.2 A input although the CT is 5 A or 1A. This
increases the measurement accuracy.
The rated CT secondary may also be less than the rated input but
the measurement accuracy near zero current will decrease.
Voltage scaling (only VAMP52)

• Rated U0 VT secondary voltage (Uosec)
• Voltage measuring mode (Umode)
Motor setting
• Rated current of the motor (Imot).
Device info
• Relay type (Type VAMP 5x)
• Serial number (SerN)
• Software version (PrgVer)
• Bootcode version (BootVer)
Date/time setup
• Day, month and year (Date)
• Time of day (Time)
• Date format (Style). The choices are "yyyy-mm-dd", "dd.nn.yyyy"
and "mm/dd/yyyy".
40 V50/en M/A018
Clock synchronisation
• Digital input for minute sync pulse (SyncDI). If any digital input
is not used for synchronization, select "-".
• Daylight saving time for NTP synchronization (DST).
• Detected source of synchronization (SyScr).
• Synchronization message counter (MsgCnt).
• Latest synchronization deviation (Dev).
The following parameters are visible only when the access level is
higher than "User".
• Offset, i.e. constant error, of the synchronization source (SyOS).
• Auto adjust interval (AAIntv).
• Average drift direction (AvDrft): "Lead" or "lag".
• Average synchronization deviation (FilDev).
SW options
• VAMP 50 Application mode, fixed Feeder (ApplMod)
VAMP 52 Application mode, Feeder / Motor (ApplMod)
• External led module installed (Ledmodule)
• Mimic display selection (MIMIC)
V50/en M/A018 41
2.4.9 Protocol menu Bus

There are three optional communication ports in the rear panel. The
availability depends on the communication options (see Chapter 14
Order information).
In addition there is a USB-connector in the front panel overruling the
local port in the rear panel.
Remote port
• Communication protocol for remote port [Protocol].
• Message counter [Msg#]. This can be used to verify that the
device is receiving messages.
• Communication error counter [Errors]
• Communication time-out error counter [Tout].
• Information of bit rate/data bits/parity/stop bits. This value is not
directly editable. Editing is done in the appropriate protocol setting
menus.
The counters are useful when testing the communication.
PC (Local/SPA-bus)
This is a second menu for local port. The VAMPSET communication
status is showed.
• Bytes/size of the transmitter buffer [Tx].
• Same information as in the previous menu.
Extension port
• Communication protocol for extension port [Protocol].
• Information of bit rate/data bits/parity/stop bits. This value is not
directly editable. Editing is done in the appropriate protocol setting
menus.
42 V50/en M/A018
Ethernet port
These parameters are used by the ethernet interface module. For
changing the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn style parameter values, VAMPSET
is recommended.
• Ethernet port protocol [Protoc].
• IP Port for protocol [Port]
• IP address [IpAddr].
• Net mask [NetMsk].
• Gateway [Gatew].
• Name server [NameSw].
• Network time protocol (NTP) server [NTPSvr].
• TCP Keep alive interval [KeepAlive]
• MAC address [MAC]
• IP Port for VAMPSET [VS Port]
• Message counter [Msg#]
• Error counter [Errors]
• Timeout counter [Tout]
Modbus
• Modbus address for this slave device [Addr]. This address has
to be unique within the system.
• Modbus bit rate [bit/s]. Default is "9600".
• Parity [Parity]. Default is ”Even”.
For details, see Chapter 9.2.2 Modbus TCP and Modbus RTU.
External I/O protocol

External I/O is actually a set of protocols which are designed to be
used with the extension I/O modules connected to the extension
port. Only one instance of this protocol is possible.
Selectable protocols:
• Modbus: This is a modbus master protocol.
Bit rate [bit/s]. Default is ”9600”.
Parity [Parity]. Default is ”Even”.
• RTDInput: This protocol is designed to be used together with
VIO 12A RTD input module.
Bit rate [bit/s]. Default is ”9600”.
Parity [Parity]. Default is ”Even”.
For details, see Chapter 9.2.8 External I/O (Modbus RTU master).
V50/en M/A018 43
SPA-bus
Several instances of this protocol are possible.
• SPA-bus address for this device [Addr]. This address has to be
unique within the system.
• Bit rate [bit/s]. Default is "9600".
• Event numbering style [Emode]. Default is "Channel".
For details, see Chapter 9.2.4 SPA-bus.
IEC 60870-5-103
Only one instance of this protocol is possible.
• Address for this device [Addr]. This address has to be unique
within the system.
• Minimum measurement response interval [MeasInt].
• ASDU6 response time mode [SyncRe].
For details, see Chapter 9.2.5 IEC 60870-5-103.
IEC 103 Disturbance recordings

For details, see Table 9.11.
Profibus
• [Mode]
• Bit rate [bit/s]. Use 2400 bps. This parameter is the bit rate
between the main CPU and the Profibus ASIC. The actual
Profibus bit rate is automatically set by the Profibus master and
can be up to 12 Mbit/s.
• Event numbering style [Emode].
• Size of the Profibus Tx buffer [InBuf].
• Size of the Profibus Rx buffer [OutBuf].
• Address for this slave device [Addr]. This address has to be
unique within the system.
• Profibus converter type [Conv]. If the shown type is a dash “-“,
either Profibus protocol has not been selected or the device has
not restarted after protocol change or there is a communication
problem between the main CPU and the Profibus ASIC.
For details, see Chapter 9.2.3 Profibus DP.
44 V50/en M/A018
DNP3
• [Parity].
• Address for this device [SlvAddr]. This address has to be unique
within the system.
• Master's address [MstrAddr].
For details, see Chapter 9.2.6 DNP 3.0.
IEC 60870-5-101
• Bit rate [bit/s]. Default is “9600”.
• [Parity].
• Link layer address for this device [LLAddr].
• ASDU address [ALAddr].
For details, see Chapter 9.2.7 IEC 60870-5-101.
2.4.10 Single line diagram editing

The single-line diagram is drawn with the VAMPSET software. For
more information, please refer to the VAMPSET manual
(VVAMPSET/EN M/xxxx).
Ba y 0 L
0A
0.000A
0kW
0Kva r
Figure 2.19: Single line diagram
2.4.11 Blocking and Interlocking configuration

The configuration of the blockings and interlockings is done with the
VAMPSET software. Any start or trip signal can be used for blocking
the operation of any protection stage. Furthermore, the interlocking
between objects can be configured in the same blocking matrix of
the VAMPSET software. For more information, please refer to the
VAMPSET manual (VVAMPSET/EN M/xxxx).
V50/en M/A018 45
3 VAMPSET PC software
3 VAMPSET PC software
The PC user interface can be used for:
• On-site parameterization of the relay
• Loading relay software from a computer
• Reading measured values, registered values and events to a
computer
• Continuous monitoring of all values and events
A USB port is available for connecting a local PC with VAMPSET to
the relay. A standard USB-B cable can be used.
The VAMPSET program can also use the TCP/IP LAN connection.
Optional hardware is required for Ethernet connection.
There is a free of charge PC program called VAMPSET available
for configuration and setting of VAMP relays. Please download the
latest VAMPSET.exe from our web page. For more information about
the VAMPSET software, please refer to the user’s manual with the
code VVAMPSET/EN M/xxxx. Also the VAMPSET user’s manual is
available at our web site.
When the relay is connected to a PC with a USB, a virtual comport
will be created. The comport number may vary depending on your
computer hardware. In order to check the correct port number, please
go to Windows Device Manager: Control
Panel->System->Hardware->Device Manager and under Ports
(COM&LPT) for “USB Serial Port”. The correct comport must be
selected from the VAMPSET menu: Settings->Communication
Settings. Speed setting can be set up to 187500 bps. Default setting
in the relay is 38400 bps which can be manually changed from the
front panel of the device.
By default every new relay will create a new comport. To avoid this
behavior, the user needs to add a REG_BINARY value called
IgnoreHWSerNum04036001 to the Windows registry and set it to
01. The location for this value is
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\UsbFlags\.
3.1 Folder view

In VAMPSET version 2.2.136, a feature called ”Folder view” was
introduced.
The idea of folder view is to make it easier for the user to work with
relay functions inside VAMPSET. When folder view is enabled,
VAMPSET gathers similar functions together and places them
appropriately under seven different folders (GENERAL,
46 V50/en M/A018
3 VAMPSET PC software 3.1 Folder view
MEASUREMENTS, INPUTS/OUTPUTS, MATRIX, LOGS and

COMMUNICATION). The contents (functions) of the folders depend
on the relay type and currently selected application mode.
Folder view can be enabled in VAMPSET via Program Settings dialog
(Settings -> Program Settings), see Figure 3.1.
Figure 3.1: Enable folder view setting in Program Settings dialog
NOTE: It is possible to enable/ disable the folder view only when VAMPSET
is disconnected from the relay and there is no configuration file
opened.
When folder view is enabled, folder buttons become visible in

VAMPSET, see Figure 3.2. Currently selected folder appears in bold.
Figure 3.2: Folder view buttons
V50/en M/A018 47
4 Introduction
4 Introduction
The numerical device includes basic voltage and frequency protection
functions needed in common applications. Further, the device
includes several programmable functions, such as trip circuit
supervision and check of synchronism and also communication
protocols for various protection and communication applications.
4.1 Main features

• Fully digital signal handling with microprocessor technology, and
high measuring accuracy on all the setting ranges due to an
accurate A/D conversion technique.
• Complete set of function for the proper protection of lines, motors
• The device can be matched to the requirements of the application
by disabling the functions that are not needed.
• Flexible control and blocking possibilities due to digital signal
control inputs (DI) and outputs (DO).
• Easy adaptability of the device to various substations and alarm
systems due to flexible signal-grouping matrix in the device.
• Possibility to control objects (e.g. circuit-breakers, disconnectors)
from relay HMI or SCADA/automation system
• Freely configurable large display with six measurement values.
• Freely configurable interlocking schemes with basic logic
functions.
• Recording of events and fault values into an event register from
which the data can be read via relay HMI or by means of a PC
based VAMPSET user interface.
• All events, indications, parameters and waveforms are in
non-volatile memory.
• Easy configuration, parameterisation and reading of information
via local HMI, or with a VAMPSET user interface.
• Easy connection to various automation systems due to several
available communication protocols. Native IEC61850
implementation is available as option.
• Flexible communication option concept available to support
different media requirements (serial interfaces, optical fibres,
Ethernet etc),
• Selective and fast Arc protection available as option to prevent
or limit damages to personnel and equipment.
48 V50/en M/A018
4 Introduction 4.2 Principles of numerical protection techniques
• Built-in, self-regulating ac/dc converter for auxiliary power supply

from any source within the range from 40 to 265 Vdc or Vac. The
alternative power supply is for 18 to 36 Vdc.
• Built-in disturbance recorder for evaluating all the analogue and
digital signals.
4.2 Principles of numerical protection

techniques
The device is fully designed using numerical technology. This means
that all the signal filtering, protection and control functions are
implemented through digital processing.
The numerical technique used in the device is primarily based on
an adapted Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT). In FFT the number
of calculations (multiplications and additions), which are required to
filter out the measuring quantities, remains reasonable.
By using synchronized sampling of the measured signal (voltage or
current) and a sample rate according to the 2n series, the FFT
technique leads to a solution, which can be realized with just a 16
bit micro controller, without using a separate DSP (Digital Signal
Processor).
The synchronized sampling means an even number of 2n samples
per period (e.g. 32 samples per a period). This means that the
frequency must be measured and the number of the samples per
period must be controlled accordingly so that the number of the
samples per period remains constant if the frequency changes.
Therefore, some current has to be injected to the current input IL1 to
adapt the network frequency for the device. However, if this is not
possible then the frequency must be parameterised to the device.
Apart from the FFT calculations, some protection functions also
require the symmetrical components to be calculated for obtaining
the positive, negative and zero phase sequence components of the
measured quantity. For example, the function of the unbalanced load
protection stage is based on the use of the negative phase sequence
component of the current.
Figure 4.1 shows a principle block diagram of a numerical device.
The main components are the energizing inputs, digital input
elements, output relays, A/D converters and the micro controller
including memory circuits. Further, a device contains a power supply
unit and a human-machine interface (HMI).
Figure 4.2 shows the heart of the numerical technology. That is the
main block diagram for calculated functions.
V50/en M/A018 49
4.2 Principles of numerical protection techniques 4 Introduction
Figure 4.3 shows a principle diagram of a single-phase overvoltage

function.
Figure 4.1: Principle block diagram of the VAMP hardware
Figure 4.2: Block diagram of signal processing and protection software
Figure 4.3: Block diagram of a basic protection function
50 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions
5 Protection functions
Each protection stage can independently be enabled or disabled
according to the requirements of the intended application.
5.1 Maximum number of protection stages

in one application
The device limits the maximum number of enabled stages to about
30, depending of the type of the stages.
For more information, please see the configuration instructions in
Chapter 2.4 Configuration and parameter setting.
5.2 General features of protection stages

Setting groups
Setting groups are controlled by using digital inputs, function keys
or virtual inputs. When none of the assigned input/inputs is/are not
active the active setting group is defined by parameter ‘SetGrp no
control state’. When controlled input activates the corresponding
setting group is activated as well. If multiple inputs are active at the
same time the active setting group is defined by ‘SetGrp priority’. By
using virtual I/O the active setting group can be controlled using the
local panel display, any communication protocol or using the inbuilt
programmable logic functions.
Example
Any digital input could be used to control setting groups but in this
example DI1, DI2, DI3 and DI4 are chosen to control setting groups
1 to 4. This setting is done with a parameter “Set group x DI control”
where x refers to the desired setting group.
V50/en M/A018 51
5.2 General features of protection stages 5 Protection functions
Figure 5.1: DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4 are configured to control Groups 1 to 4 respectively.
“SetGrp priority” is used to give a condition to a situation where two

or more digital inputs, controlling setting groups, are active and at a
same time . SetGrp priority could have vales “1 to 4” or “4 to 1”.
Figure 5.2: SetGrp priority setting is located in the Valid Protection stages view.
Assuming that DI2 and DI3 are active at a same time and SetGrp
priority is set to “1 to 4” setting group 2 will become active. In case
SetGrp priority is reversed i.e. it is set to “4 to 1” setting group 3
would be active.
Forcing start or trip condition for testing

The status of a protection stage can be one of the followings:
• Ok = ‘-‘
The stage is idle and is measuring the analog quantity for the
protection. No fault detected.
• Blocked
The stage is detecting a fault but blocked by some reason.
• Start
The stage is counting the operation delay.
• Trip
The stage has tripped and the fault is still on.
The blocking reason may be an active signal via the block matrix
from other stages, the programmable logic or any digital input. Some
stages also have inbuilt blocking logic. For more details about block
matrix, see Chapter 8.6 Blocking matrix.
52 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.2 General features of protection stages
Forcing start or trip condition for testing purposes

There is a "Force flag" parameter which, when activated, allows
forcing the status of any protection stage to be "start" or "trip" for a
half second. By using this forcing feature any current or voltage
injection to the device is not necessary to check the output matrix
configuration, to check the wiring from the output relays to the circuit
breaker and also to check that communication protocols are correctly
transferring event information to a SCADA system.
After testing the force flag will automatically reset 5-minute after the
last local panel push button activity.
The force flag also enables forcing of the output relays.
Force flag can be found in relays menu.
Start and trip signals

Every protection stage has two internal binary output signals: start
and trip. The start signal is issued when a fault has been detected.
The trip signal is issued after the configured operation delay unless
the fault disappears before the end of the delay time.
Output matrix
Using the output matrix the user connects the internal start and trip
signals to the output relays and indicators. For more details, see
Chapter 8.5 Output matrix.
Blocking
Any protection function, except arc protection, can be blocked with
internal and external signals using the block matrix (Chapter 8.6
Blocking matrix). Internal signals are for example logic outputs and
start and trip signals from other stages and external signals are for
example digital and virtual inputs.
When a protection stage is blocked, it won't pick-up in case of a fault
condition is detected. If blocking is activated during the operation
delay, the delay counting is frozen until the blocking goes off or the
pick-up reason, i.e. the fault condition, disappears. If the stage is
already tripping, the blocking has no effect.
V50/en M/A018 53
5.2 General features of protection stages 5 Protection functions
Retardation time
Retardation time is the time a protection relay needs to notice, that
a fault has been cleared during the operation time delay. This
parameter is important when grading the operation time delay settings
between relays.
RetardationTime
tFAULT
tRET < 50 ms
DELAY SETTING > tFAULT + tRET
TRIP CONTACTS
Figure 5.3: Definition for retardation time. If the delay setting would be slightly
shorter, an unselective trip might occur (the dash line pulse).
For example when there is a big fault in an outgoing feeder, it might

start i.e. pick-up both the incoming and outgoing feeder relay.
However the fault must be cleared by the outgoing feeder relay and
the incoming feeder relay must not trip. Although the operating delay
setting of the incoming feeder is more than at the outgoing feeder,
the incoming feeder might still trip, if the operation time difference is
not big enough. The difference must be more than the retardation
time of the incoming feeder relay plus the operating time of the
outgoing feeder circuit breaker.
Figure 5.3 shows an overvoltage fault seen by the incoming feeder,
when the outgoing feeder does clear the fault. If the operation delay
setting would be slightly shorter or if the fault duration would be
slightly longer than in the figure, an unselective trip might happen
(the dashed 40 ms pulse in the figure). In VAMP devices the
retardation time is less than 50 ms.
Reset time (release time)

Figure 5.4 shows an example of reset time i.e. release delay, when
the relay is clearing an overcurrent fault. When the relay’s trip
contacts are closed the circuit breaker (CB) starts to open. After the
CB contacts are open the fault current will still flow through an arc
between the opened contacts. The current is finally cut off when the
arc extinguishes at the next zero crossing of the current. This is the
start moment of the reset delay. After the reset delay the trip contacts
and start contact are opened unless latching is configured. The
precise reset time depends on the fault size; after a big fault the reset
time is longer. The reset time also depends on the specific protection
stage.
54 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.2 General features of protection stages
The maximum reset time for each stage is specified in Chapter 12.3
Protection functions. For most stages it is less than 95 ms.
tSET
tCB
tRESET
TRIP CONTACTS
Figure 5.4: Reset time is the time it takes the trip or start relay contacts to open
after the fault has been cleared.
Hysteresis or dead band

When comparing a measured value against a pick-up value, some
amount of hysteresis is needed to avoid oscillation near equilibrium
situation. With zero hysteresis any noise in the measured signal or
any noise in the measurement itself would cause unwanted oscillation
between fault-on and fault-off situations.
Hysteresis_GT
hysteresis
PICK UP LEVEL
> PICK UP
Figure 5.5: Behaviour of a greater than comparator. For example in overvoltage

stages the hysteresis (dead band) acts according this figure.
Hysteresis_LT
hysteresis
PICK UP LEVEL
< PICK UP
Figure 5.6: Behaviour of a less than comparator. For example in under-voltage

and under frequency stages the hysteresis (dead band) acts according this figure.
V50/en M/A018 55
5.3 Application modes 5 Protection functions
5.3 Application modes

NOTE: Application modes are available only in VAMP52
The application modes available are the feeder protection mode and
the motor protection mode. In the feeder protection mode all current
dependent protection functions are relative to nominal current IN
derived by CT ratios. The motor protection functions are unavailable
in the feeder protection mode. In the motor protection mode all current
dependent protection functions are relative to motor’s nominal current
IMOT. The motor protection mode enables motor protection functions.
All functions which are available in the feeder protection mode are
also available in the motor protection mode. Default value of the
application mode is the feeder protection mode.
The application mode can be changed with VAMPSET software or
from CONF menu of the device. Changing the application mode
requires configurator password.
5.4 Current protection function

dependencies
The current based protection functions are relative to IMODE, which
is dependent of the application mode. In the motor, protection mode
all of the current based functions are relative to IMOT and in the feeder
protection mode to IN with following exceptions.
I2> (46), I2>> (47), IST> (48), N> (66) are always dependent on IMOT
and they are only available when application mode is in the motor
protection.
56 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.5 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51)
5.5 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51)

Overcurrent protection is used against short circuit faults and heavy
overloads.
The overcurrent function measures the fundamental frequency
component of the phase currents. The protection is sensitive for the
highest of the three phase currents. Whenever this value exceeds
the user's pick-up setting of a particular stage, this stage picks up
and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer
than the user's operation delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Figure 5.7: Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage I>
Figure 5.8: Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage I>> and I>>>
Three independent stages

There are three separately adjustable overcurrent stages: I>, I>>
and I>>>. The first stage I> can be configured for definite time (DT)
or inverse time operation characteristic (IDMT). The stages I>> and
I>>> have definite time operation characteristic. By using the definite
delay type and setting the delay to its minimum, an instantaneous
(ANSI 50) operation is obtained.
V50/en M/A018 57
5.5 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51) 5 Protection functions
Figure 5.7 shows a functional block diagram of the I> overcurrent

stage with definite time and inverse time operation time. Figure 5.8
shows a functional block diagram of the I>> and I>>> overcurrent
stages with definite time operation delay.
Inverse operation time

Inverse delay means that the operation time depends on the amount
the measured current exceeds the pick-up setting. The bigger the
fault current is the faster will be the operation. Accomplished inverse
delays are available for the I> stage. The inverse delay types are
described in Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation. The device will
show the currently used inverse delay curve graph on the local panel
display.
Inverse time limitation

The maximum measured secondary current is 50 x IN. This limits
the scope of inverse curves with high pick-up settings. See
Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation for more information.
Cold load and inrush current handling

See Chapter 6.3 Cold load pick-up and inrush current detection.
Setting groups
There are four settings groups available for each stage. Switching
between setting groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual
inputs (communication, logic) and manually. See Chapter 5.2 General
features of protection stages for more details.
Table 5.1: Parameters of the overcurrent stage I> (50/51)
Parameter Value Unit Description Note
Status - Current status of the stage -
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
TripTime s Estimated time to trip
SCntr Cumulative start counter C
TCntr Cumulative trip counter C
SetGrp 1, 2, 3, 4 Active setting group Set
SGrpDI Digital signal to select the active setting group Set
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
LEDx LED indicator signal
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
58 V50/en M/A018

Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is a common Set
flag for all stages and output relays, too. This flag is automatically
On reset 5 minutes after the last front panel push button pressing.
ILmax A The supervised value. Max. of IL1, IL2 and IL3
Status Current status of the stage
I> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
I> xIMODE Pick-up setting Set
Curve - Delay curve family: Set
DT Definite time
IEC, IEEE, Inverse time. See Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation.
IEEE2, RI, PrgN
Type - Delay type Set
DT Definite time
NI, VI, EI, LTI, Inverse time. See Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation.
Parameters
t> s Definite operation time (for definite time only) Set
k> Inverse delay multiplier (for inverse time only) Set
Dly20x s Delay at 20xImode
IncHarm On/off Include Harmonics
Delay curves Graphic delay curve picture (only local display)
A, B, C, D, E User's constants for standard equations. Type=Parameters. Set
Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation.
Recorded LOG1 Date and time of trip
values
Type Fault type
Flt xIMODE Fault current
Load xIMODE Pre-fault current
Edly % Elapsed delay time
SetGrp Active set group during fault
Set = An editable parameter (password needed). C = Can be cleared to zero. F = Editable when force flag is on.
For details of setting ranges, see Table 12.18.
Table 5.2: Parameters of the overcurrent stages I>>, I>>> (50/51)

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
V50/en M/A018 59
5.5 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51) 5 Protection functions

- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
flag for all stages and output relays, too. Automatically reset by a
On 5-minute timeout.
I>>, I>>> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
I>>, I>>> xIMODE Pick-up setting Set
t>>, t>>> s Definite operation time. Set
IncHarm On/off Include Harmonics Set
For details of setting ranges, see Table 12.19, Table 12.20.
Recorded values of the latest eight faults

There is detailed information available of the eight latest faults: Time
stamp, fault type, fault current, load current before the fault, elapsed
delay and setting group.
Table 5.3: Recorded values of the overcurrent stages (8 latest faults) I>, I>>,
I>>> (50/51)
Parameter Value Unit Description
yyyy-mm-dd Time stamp of the recording, date
hh:mm:ss.ms Time stamp, time of day
Type - Fault type
1-N Ground fault
2-N Ground fault
3-N Ground fault
1-2 Two phase fault
2-3 Two phase fault
3-1 Two phase fault
1-2-3 Three phase fault

Flt xIMODE Maximum fault current
Load xIMODE 1 s average phase currents before the fault
EDly % Elapsed time of the operating time setting. 100% = trip
SetGrp 1, 2, 3, 4 Active setting group during fault
60 V50/en M/A018
5.5.1 Remote controlled overcurrent scaling

Pick-up setting of the three over current stages can also be controlled
remotely. In this case only two scaling coefficients are possible:
100% (the scaling is inactive) and any configured value between
10% - 200% (the scaling is active). When scaling is enabled all
settings of group one are copied to group two but the pick-up value
of group two is changed according the given value (10-200%).
• This feature can be enabled/disabled via VAMPSET or by using
the local panel. When using VAMPSET the scaling can be
activated and adjusted in the “protection stage status 2” –menu.
When using the local panel similar settings can be found from
the “prot” -menu.
• It is also possible to change the scaling factor remotely by using
the modbus TCP –protocol. When changing the scaling factor
remotely value of 1% is equal to 1. Check the correct modbus
address for this application from the VAMPSET or from the
communication parameter list.
Figure 5.9: Remote scaling example.
In the Figure 5.9 can be seen the affect of remote scaling. After
enabling group is changed from group one to group two and all
settings from group one are copied to group two. The difference is
that group two uses scaled pick-up settings.
NOTE: When remote scaling function is used, it replaces all the settings of
group 2. So this function cannot be used simultaneously with normal
group change.
V50/en M/A018 61
5.6 Current unbalance stage I2/I1> (46) in feeder mode 5 Protection functions
5.6 Current unbalance stage I2/I1> (46) in

feeder mode
The purpose of the unbalance stage is to detect unbalanced load
conditions, for example a broken conductor of a heavy loaded
overhead line in case there is no earth fault. The operation of the
unbalanced load function is based on the negative phase sequence
component I2 related to the positive phase sequence component I1.
This is calculated from the phase currents using the method of
symmetrical components. The function requires that the measuring
inputs are connected correctly so that the rotation direction of the
phase currents are as in Chapter 11.11 Connection examples. The
unbalance protection has definite time operation characteristic.
I I1 = IL1 + aIL2 + a2IL3
K2 = 2
I1 I2 = IL1 + a2IL2 + aIL3
1 3
a = 1∠120° = − + j
2 2 , a phasor rotating constant
Table 5.4: Setting parameters of the current unbalanced stage I2/I1> (46) in
feeder mode
Parameter Value Unit Default Description
I2/I1> 2 – 70 % 20 Setting value, I2/I1
t> 1.0 – 600.0 s 10.0 Definite operating time
Type DT - DT The selection of time characteristics
INV
S_On Enabled; Disabled - Enabled Start on event
S_Off Enabled; Disabled - Enabled Start off event
T_On Enabled; Disabled - Enabled Trip on event
T_Off Enabled; Disabled - Enabled Trip off event
Table 5.5: Measured and recorded values of the current unbalanced stage
I2/I1> (46) in feeder mode
Measured value I2/I1 % Relative negative sequence component
Recorded values SCntr Cumulative start counter
TCntr Cumulative trip counter
Flt % Maximum I2/I1 fault component
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set oper-
ating time; 100% = tripping
62 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.7 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode
5.7 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in

motor mode
Current unbalance in a motor causes double frequency currents in
the rotor. This warms up the surface of the rotor and the available
thermal capacity of the rotor is much less than the thermal capacity
of the whole motor. Thus an rms current based overload protection
(see Chapter 5.16 Thermal overload protection T> (49)) is not capable
to protect a motor against current unbalance.
The current unbalance protection is based on the negative sequence
of the base frequency phase currents. Both definite time and inverse
time characteristics are available.
Inverse delay
The inverse delay is based on the following equation.
T= Operation time
Equation 5.1:
K1 = Delay multiplier
K1 I2 = Measured and calculated negative sequence phase
T=
 I2 
2
current of fundamental frequency.
  − K 22
 I MOT  IMOT = Nominal current of the motor
K2 = Pick-up setting I2> in pu. The maximum allowed degree
of unbalance.
Example:
K1 = 15 s
I2 = 22.9 % = 0.229 x IMOT
K2 = 5 % = 0.05 x IMOT
15
t= 2
= 300.4
 0.229  2
  − 0.05
 1 
The operation time in this example will be five minutes.
More stages (definite time delay only)

If more than one definite time delay stages are needed for current
unbalance protection, the freely programmable stages can be used
(Chapter 5.22 Programmable stages (99)).
Setting groups
There are four settings groups available. Switching between setting
groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual inputs
V50/en M/A018 63
5.7 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode 5 Protection functions
(communication, logic) and manually. See Chapter 5.2 General

CurrentUnbalanceChar
2000
1000
500 K2 = 2 % K2 = 40 % K2 = 70 %
200
Operation time (s)

100 K1 = 50 s
50
K2 = 2 % K2 = 40 % K2 = 70 %
20
10
5
K1 = 1 s
2
1
0 20 40 60 80 100
Negative sequence current I2 (%)
Figure 5.10: Inverse operation delay of current unbalance stage I2>. The longest
delay is limited to 1000 seconds (=16min 40s).
Table 5.6: Parameters of the current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is a Set
common flag for all stages and output relays, too. Automat-
On ically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
I2/Imot % Imot The supervised value.
I2> % Imot Pick-up setting Set
t> s Definite operation time (Type=DT) Set
Type DT Definite time Set
INV Inverse time (Equation 5.1)

K1 s Delay multiplier (Type =INV) Set
64 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.8 Phase reversal/incorrect phase sequence protection I2>> (47)

stamp, unbalance current, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 5.7: Recorded values of the current unbalance stage (8 latest faults)
I2> (46) in motor mode
Flt % Imot Maximum unbalance current
SetGrp 1, 2, 3, 4 Active setting group during the fault
5.8 Phase reversal/incorrect phase

sequence protection I2>> (47)
The phase sequence stage prevents the motor from being started
in to wrong direction, thus protecting the load.
When the ratio between negative and positive sequence current
exceeds 80% and the average of three phase currents exceeds 0.2
x IMOT in the start-up situation, the phase sequence stage starts and
trips 100 ms after start-up.
Table 5.8: Parameters of the incorrect phase sequence stage I2>> (47)
Parameter Value/unit Description
Measured value I2/I1 % Neg. phase seq. current/pos. phase seq. current
Recorded values SCntr Start counter (Start) reading
TCntr Trip counter (Trip) reading
Flt % Max. value of fault current
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set operate time,
100% = tripping
V50/en M/A018 65
5.9 Stall protection IST> (48) 5 Protection functions
5.9 Stall protection IST> (48)

The stall protection unit IST> measures the fundamental frequency
component of the phase currents.
Stage Ist> can be configured for definite time or inverse time operation
characteristic.
The stall protection stage protects the motor against prolonged
direct-on-line (DOL) starts caused by e.g. a stalled rotor, too high
inertia of the load or too low voltage. This function is sensitive to the
fundamental frequency component of the phase currents.
The IST> stage can be configured for definite operation time or inverse
time operation characteristic. For a weak voltage supply the inverse
characteristics is useful allowing more start time when a voltage drop
decreases the start current and increases the start time. Equation 5.2
defines the inverse operation time. Figure 5.12 shows an example
of the inverse characteristics.
T= Inverse operation time.

Equation 5.2:
Rated start current of the motor “Nom motor start current”
ISTART =
IMOTST. The default setting is 6.00xIMOT.
2
I  IMEAS = Measured current
T =  start  Tstart Maximum allowed start time “Inv. time coefficient” k> for
 I meas  TSTART =
the motor at rated voltage.
The pick-up setting “Motor start detection current” IST> is the start
detection level of the start current. While the current has been less
than 10% of Imot and then within 200 milliseconds exceeds the
setting IST>, the stall protection stage starts to count the operation
time TSTART. When current drops below 120 % x IMOT the stall
protection stage releases. Stall protection is active only during the
starting of the motor.
Istlohko
Im1
& Start
Im2
Im3
MAX > ts tr
& Register
event
Block t
Trip
³1
& Register
event
Motor nom. Delay Definite / inverse Inverse delay Enable events

start current time
Figure 5.11: Block diagram of the stall protection stage IST>.
66 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.9 Stall protection IST> (48)
Figure 5.12: Example of an inverse operation time delay of the stall protection
stage. If the measured current is less than the specified start current ISTART the
operation time will be longer than the specified start time TSTART and vice versa.
Table 5.9: Parameters of the stall protection stage IST> (48)

Status Status Status of the stage
SCntr Cumulative start counter
TCntr Cumulative trip counter
Force ON/Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is
a common flag for all stages and output relays, too.
This flag is automatically reset 5 minutes after the last
front panel push button pressing.
Parameters Il A Phase current IL, not settable
Status Status of stage
Ist> A Motor start detection current scaled to primary value,
calculated by relay
Ist> xImot Motor start detection current. Must be less than initial
motor starting current.
ImotSt A Nominal motor starting current scaled to primary value,
calculated by relay
ImotSt xImot Nominal motor starting current
Type DT Operation charact./ definite time
Inv Operation charact./ inverse time
t> S Operation time [s]
tInv> S Time multiplier at inverse time
Recorded values Log Start and trip time
Flt xImot Maximum fault current.
EDly % Elapsed time of the operating time setting. 100% =
trip
V50/en M/A018 67
5.9 Stall protection IST> (48) 5 Protection functions
5.9.1 Motor status

There are three possible startus for a motor: stopped, starting or
running.
• Motor stopped: Motor average current is less than 10% of the
motor nominal current.
• Motor starting: To reach the starting position motor has to be
stopped for least 500ms before starting. Motor average current
has to increase above the motor start detection current (setting
value) within 200ms. Motor will remain starting as long as the
terms for turning into running condition are not filled.
• Motor running: Motor is able to turn into a running position from
both stopped and starting position. Low limit for motor running
is 20% of the motors nominal and the high limit for motor running
is 120% of the motors nominal current.
Figure 5.13: Motor status via VAMPSET and local panel.
The status of the motor can be viewed via VAMPSET -software or

by looking from the local panel of the relay (Mstat). Statuses Starting
and running can be found from the output –and block matrix.
Therefore it is possible to use these signals for tripping or indication
and for blocking purposes.
Figure 5.14: Motor status in output –and block matrix.
68 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.10 Frequent start protection N> (66)
Softstart
Frequency converter drives and soft starter applications will not
initiate motor start signal due to the low current while starting motor.
Motor will change directly from stopped to running position when the
current increases into a certain level.
Figure 5.15: The terms of soft start.
Normal starting sequence

As a default for the motor start detection, relay uses value of 6 times
motor nominal. This value is editable.
Figure 5.16: The terms of normal starting sequence.
5.10 Frequent start protection N> (66)

The simplest way to start an asynchronous motor is just to switch
the stator windings to the supply voltages. However every such start
will heat up the motor considerably because the initial currents are
significantly above the rated current.
If the motor manufacturer has defined the maximum number of starts
within an hour or/and the minimum time between two consecutive
starts this stage is easy to apply to prevent too frequent starts.
When current has been less than 10% of the motor nominal current
and then exceeds the value Motor start detection current of IST>
(Stall protection stage), situation is recognized as a motor start. After
the recognition of the motor start if current drops to a less than 10
% of the motor nominal current, stage considers motor to be stopped.
Frequent start protection stage will provide N> alarm signal when
the second last start has been done and remains active until the
maximum amount of motor starts are reached or one hour of time is
passed.
V50/en M/A018 69
5.10 Frequent start protection N> (66) 5 Protection functions
The N> motor start inhibit signal activates after starting the motor
and remains active a period of time that is defined for parameter Min
time between motor starts. After the given time has passed, inhibit
signal returns to inactive state.
When start counter of stage reaches the value defined for Max. motor
starts/hour, N> motor start inhibit signal activates and remains active
until one hour has passed.
Frequent start protection stage correlation to output contacts is
defined in output matrix menu. See Chapter 8.5 Output matrix.
Figure 5.17 shows an application.
+ +
− −
STOP Open Close START
Coil Coil
M
+
VAMP relay
Output matrix
T1 A1
I> start
I> trip
N> alarm
N> motor start inhibit
Figure 5.17: Application for preventing too frequent starting using the N> stage.
The signal relay A1 has been configured to normal closed (NC) in device “relays”
menu and is controlled by N> motor start inhibit signal. Whenever N> motor start
inhibit signal becomes active, it prevents circuit breaker to be closed.
70 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.10 Frequent start protection N> (66)
Table 5.10: Parameters of the frequent start protection N> (66)

Measured value Status Disabled/ Enabled Stage status
SCntr Start counter
Mot strs Motor starts in last hour
t Min Elapsed time from motor start
Force On / Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is
This flag is automatically reset 5 minutes after the last
front panel push button pressing
Setting values Mot strs Max. starts in one hour
t Min Elapsed time from motor start
Status Stage status
SCntr Start counter
Sts/h Max. motor start per hour
Interval Min Min. interval between two consecutive starts
Recorded values LOG1 Date and time of trip
N.st / h Motor starts / hour
TimeFromSt Elapsed time from motor start
Tot Mot Strs Number of total motor starts
Type Fault type
Event Enabling Alr_on Alarm on event
Alr_off Alarm off Event
MoStrt_dis Motor start disabled
MotStrt_En Motor start enabled
V50/en M/A018 71
5.11 Undercurrent protection I< (37) 5 Protection functions
5.11 Undercurrent protection I< (37)

The undercurrent unit measures the fundamental component of the
phase currents.
The stage I< can be configured for definite time characteristic.
The undercurrent stage is protecting rather the device driven by the
motor e.g. a submersible pump, than the motor itself.
Table 5.11: Parameters of the undercurrent stage I< (37)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
SCntr Start counter (Start) reading C
TCntr Trip counter (Trip) reading C
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
flag for all stages and output relays, too. Automatically reset by a
On 5-minute timeout.
ILmin A Min. value of phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3 in primary value
Status Status of protection stage
I< A Start detection current scaled to primary value, calculated by relay
I< % Imode Setting value in percentage of Imode
t< s Operation time delay [s]
NoCmp %Imode Block limit
NoCmp 60 A Block limit scaled to primary value, calculated by relay
Log Start and trip time
Type 1-N, 2-N, 3-N Fault type/single-phase fault e.g.: 1-N = fault on phase L1
1-2, 2-3, 1-3 Fault type/two-phase fault
e.g.: 2-3 = fault between L2 and L3

1-2-3 Fault type/three-phase fault
Flt x Imode Min. value of fault current as per times Imot
Load x Imode 1s mean value of pre-fault currents IL1—IL3
Edly % Elapsed time as compared to the set operate time, 100% = tripping
72 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.12 Directional earth fault protection I0φ> (67N)
5.12 Directional earth fault protection I0φ>

(67N)
The directional earth fault protection is used in networks or motors
where a selective and sensitive earth fault protection is needed and
in applications with varying network structure and length.
The device consists of versatile protection functions for earth fault
protection in various network types.
The function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component
of the residual current and zero sequence voltage and the phase
angle between them. The attenuation of the third harmonic is more
than 60 dB. Whenever the size of I0 and U0 and the phase angle
between I0 and U0 fulfils the pick-up criteria, the stage picks up and
a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer than
the user's operation time delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Polarization
The negative zero sequence voltage U0 is used for polarization i.e.
the angle reference for I0. The U0 voltage is measured via energizing
input U0 or it is calculated from the phase voltages internally
depending on the selected voltage measurement mode (see
Chapter 7.7 Voltage measurement modes):
• 3LN/LLY and 3LN/LNY: the zero sequence voltage is calculated
from the phase voltages and therefore any separate zero
sequence voltage transformers are not needed. The setting
values are relative to the configured voltage transformer (VT)
voltage/ .
• 3LN+U0: the zero sequence voltage is measured with voltage
transformer(s) for example using a broken delta connection. The
setting values are relative to the VT0 secondary voltage defined
in configuration.
NOTE: The U0 signal must be connected according the connection diagram

(Figure 11.10) in order to get a correct polarization.
Modes for different network types

The available modes are:
V50/en M/A018 73
5.12 Directional earth fault protection I0φ> (67N) 5 Protection functions
• ResCap
This mode consists of two sub modes, Res and Cap. A digital
signal can be used to dynamically switch between these two sub
modes. This feature can be used with compensated networks,
when the Petersen coil is temporarily switched off.
- Res
The stage is sensitive to the resistive component of the
selected I0 signal. This mode is used with compensated
networks (resonant grounding) and networks earthed with
a high resistance. Compensation is usually done with a
Petersen coil between the neutral point of the main
transformer and earth. In this context "high resistance"
means, that the fault current is limited to be less than the
rated phase current. The trip area is a half plane as drawn
in Figure 5.19. The base angle is usually set to zero degrees.
- Cap
The stage is sensitive to the capacitive component of the
selected I0 signal. This mode is used with unearthed
networks. The trip area is a half plane as drawn in
Figure 5.19. The base angle is usually set to zero degrees.
• Sector
This mode is used with networks earthed with a small
resistance. In this context "small" means, that a fault current
may be more than the rated phase currents. The trip area has a
shape of a sector as drawn in Figure 5.20. The base angle is
usually set to zero degrees or slightly on the lagging inductive
side (i.e. negative angle).
• Undir
This mode makes the stage equal to the undirectional stage I0>.
The phase angle and U0 amplitude setting are discarded. Only
the amplitude of the selected I0 input is supervised.
Input signal selection

Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs
and signals:
• Input I0 for all networks other than rigidly earthed.
• Calculated signal I0Calc for rigidly and low impedance earthed
networks. I0Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 = 3I0.
74 V50/en M/A018
Intermittent earth fault detection

Short earth faults make the protection to start (to pick up), but will
not cause a trip. (Here a short fault means one cycle or more. For
shorter than 1 ms transient type of intermittent earth faults in
compensated networks there is a dedicated stage I0INT> 67NI.) When
starting happens often enough, such intermittent faults can be cleared
using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the
operation delay counter is not cleared between adjacent faults and
finally the stage will trip.
Two independent stages

There are two separately adjustable stages: I0φ> and I0φ>>. Both
the stages can be configured for definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay operation time.
Inverse operation time

delays are available for both stages I0φ> and I0φ>>. The inverse
delay types are described in Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation.
The device will show a scaleable graph of the configured delay on
the local panel display.

The maximum measured secondary residual current is 10 x I0N and
maximum measured phase current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope
of inverse curves with high pick-up settings. See Chapter 5.24 Inverse
time operation for more information.
Setting groups
V50/en M/A018 75
Figure 5.18: Block diagram of the directional earth fault stages I0φ>, I0φ>>
Figure 5.19: Operation characteristic of the directional earth fault protection in Res
or Cap mode. Res mode can be used with compensated networks and Cap mode
is used with ungrounded networks.
76 V50/en M/A018
70
70
Figure 5.20: Two example of operation characteristics of the directional earth fault
stages in sector mode. The drawn I0 phasor in both figures is inside the trip area. The
angle offset and half sector size are user’s parameters.
Table 5.12: Parameters of the directional earth fault stages I0φ>, I0φ>> (67N)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
SCntr Cumulative start counter Clr
TCntr Cumulative trip counter Clr
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This Set
is a common flag for all stages and output relays,
On too. Automatically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
Io pu The supervised value according the parameter "In-
put" below.
IoCalc
(I0φ> only)
IoPeak
IoRes pu Resistive part of I0 (only when "InUse"=Res)
IoCap pu Capacitive part of I0 (only when "InUse"=Cap)
Ioφ> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
V50/en M/A018 77

Ioφ> pu Pick-up setting relative to the parameter “Input” and Set
the corresponding CT value
Uo> % Pick-up setting for U0 Set
Uo % Measured U0
DT Definite time
IEC, IEEE, Inverse time. Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation.

IEEE2, RI, PrgN
Type - Delay type. Set
DT Definite time
NI, VI, EI, LTI, Inverse time. Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation.
Parameters
Mode ResCap High impedance earthed nets Set
Sector Low impedance earthed nets
Undir Undirectional mode

Offset ° Angle offset (MTA) for RecCap and Sector modes Set
Sector Default = 88 ±° Half sector size of the trip area on both sides of the Set
offset angle
ChCtrl Res/Cap control in mode ResCap Set
Res Fixed to Resistive characteristic
Cap Fixed to Capacitive characteristic
DIx Controlled by digital input
VIx Controlled by virtual input
InUse Selected submode in mode ResCap.
- Mode is not ResCap
Res Submode = resistive
Cap Submode = capacitive
Input Io X1:7, 8, 9. See Chapter 11 Connections. Set
IoCalc IL1 + IL2 + IL3
IoPeak X1:7, 8, 9 peak mode (I0φ> only)
Intrmt s Intermittent time Set
Dly20x s Delay at 20xI0N
A, B, C, D, E User's constants for standard equations. Set
Type=Parameters. See Chapter 5.24 Inverse time
operation.
78 V50/en M/A018

There is detailed information available of the eight latest earth faults:
Time stamp, fault current, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 5.13: Recorded values of the directional earth fault stages (8 latest
faults) I0φ>, I0φ>> (67N)
Flt pu Maximum earth fault current
Resistive part of I0 (only when "InUse"=Res)
Capacitive part of I0 (only when "InUse"=Cap)

Angle ° Fault angle of I0
-U0 = 0°
Uo % Max. U0 voltage during the fault
V50/en M/A018 79
5.13 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N) 5 Protection functions
5.13 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N)

The undirectional earth fault protection is to detect earth faults in low
impedance earthed networks. In high impedance earthed networks,
compensated networks and isolated networks undirectional earth
fault can be used as back-up protection.
The undirectional earth fault function is sensitive to the fundamental
frequency component of the residual current 3I0. The attenuation of
the third harmonic is more than 60 dB. Whenever this fundamental
value exceeds the user's pick-up setting of a particular stage, this
stage picks up and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation
remains on longer than the user's operation time delay setting, a trip
signal is issued.
Figure 5.21: Block diagram of the earth fault stage I0>
Figure 5.22: Block diagram of the earth fault stages I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>>
Figure 5.21 shows a functional block diagram of the I0> earth

overcurrent stage with definite time and inverse time operation time.
Figure 5.22 shows a functional block diagram of the I0>>, I0>>> and
I0>>>> earth fault stages with definite time operation delay.
80 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.13 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N)
Input signal selection

Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs
and signals:
• Input I0 for all networks other than rigidly earthed.
• Calculated signal I0Calc for rigidly and low impedance earthed
networks. I0Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3.
Intermittent earth fault detection

Short earth faults make the protection to start (to pick up), but will
not cause a trip. (Here a short fault means one cycle or more. For
shorter than 1 ms transient type of intermittent earth faults in
compensated networks there is a dedicated stage I0INT> 67NI.) When
starting happens often enough, such intermittent faults can be cleared
using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the
operation delay counter is not cleared between adjacent faults and
finally the stage will trip.
Four or six independent undirectional earth fault overcurrent

stages
There are four separately adjustable earth fault stages: I0>, I0>>,
I0>>>, and I0>>>>. The first stage I0> can be configured for definite
time (DT) or inverse time operation characteristic (IDMT). The other
stages have definite time operation characteristic. By using the
definite delay type and setting the delay to its minimum, an
instantaneous (ANSI 50N) operation is obtained.
VAMP 52 uses the directional earth fault stages (Chapter 5.12
Directional earth fault protection I0φ> (67N)) in undirectional mode,
two more stages with inverse operation time delay are available for
undirectional earth fault protection.
Inverse operation time (I0> stage only)

delays are available for the I0> stage. The inverse delay types are
described in Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation. The device will
show a scaleable graph of the configured delay on the local panel
display.

The maximum measured secondary residual current is 10 x I0N and
maximum measured phase current is 50 x IN. This limits the scope
of inverse curves with high pick-up settings. See Chapter 5.24 Inverse
time operation for more information.
V50/en M/A018 81
Setting groups
Table 5.14: Parameters of the undirectional earth fault stage I0> (50N/51N)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Io, IoCalc, IoPeak pu The supervised value according the parameter "In-
put" below.
Io> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
Io> pu Pick-up setting relative to the parameter "Input" and Set
DT Definite time
IEC, IEEE, Inverse time. Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation.

IEEE2, RI, PrgN
Type - Delay type. Set
DT Definite time
NI, VI, EI, LTI, Inverse time. Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation.
Parameters
IoPeak X1:7, 8, 9. peak mode (I0φ> only).
Intrmt s Intermittent time Set
82 V50/en M/A018

Dly20x s Delay at 20 x I0N
Dly1x Delay at 1 x I0N
A, B, C, D, E User’s constants for standard equations. Set
Type=Parameters. See Chapter 5.24 Inverse time
operation.
Table 5.15: Parameters of the undirectional earth fault stage I0>>, I0>>>,
I0>>>> (50N/51N)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
SgrpDI - Digital signal to select the active setting group Set
- None
Dix Digital input
Vix Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Io pu The supervised value according the parameter “In-
put” below.
IoCalc
Io>>, Io>>>, Io>>>> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
Io>>, Io>>>, Io>>>> pu Pick-up setting relative to the parameter "Input" and Set
V50/en M/A018 83

There is detailed information available of the eight latest earth faults:
Time stamp, fault current, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 5.16: Recorded values of the undirectional earth fault stages (8 latest
faults) I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>> (50N/51N)
Flt pu Maximum earth fault current
5.13.1 Earth fault faulty phase detection algorithm

Phase recognition:
A zero sequence overcurrent has been detected.
Faulted phase/ phases are detected in 2 stage system.
1. Algorithm is using delta principle to detect the faulty phase/
phases.
2. Algorithm confirms the faulty phase with neutral current angle
comparison to the suspected faulted phase.
Ideal grounded network:
When there is forward earth fault in phase L1, its current will increase
creating calculated or measured zero sequence current in phase
angle of 0 degrees. If there is reverse earth fault in phase L1, its
current will degrease creating calculated or measured zero sequence
current in phase angle of 180 degrees.
angle of -120 degrees. If there is reverse earth fault in phase L2, its
current in phase angle of 60 degrees.
angle of 120 degrees. If there is reverse earth fault in phase L3 its
current in phase angle of -60 degrees.
Implementation:
When faulty phase is recognized, it will be recorded in 50N protection
fault log (also in event list and alarm screen). This faulted phase and
direction recording function has a tick box for enabling/disabling in
84 V50/en M/A018
protection stage settings. For compensated network, this is not a

100% reliable algorithm because it depends on the network
compensation degree. So for compensated networks this feature
can be turned off so it will not cause confusion. For high impedance
earthed networks, there will be drop down menu in both setting
groups to choose between RES/CAP. RES is default and it is for
earthed networks. When CAP is chosen, the Io angle will be corrected
to inductive direction 90 degrees and after that faulty phase detection
is made.
Possible outcomes and conditions for those detections:
• FWD L1
Phase L1 increases above the set limit and two other phases
remain inside the set (delta) limit. Io current angle is +/- 60
degrees from L1 phase angle.
• FDW L2
• FDW L3
• FWD L1-L2
Phase L1 and L2 increase above the set limit and phase L3
remains inside the set (delta) limit. Io current angle is between
L1 and L2 phase angles.
• FWD L2-L3
• FWD L3-L1
• FWD L1-L2-L3
All three phase currents increase above the set delta limit.
• REV 1 (any one phase)
One phase decreases below the set delta limit and other two
phases remain inside the delta limit.
• REV 2 (any two phase)
Two phases decrease below the set delta limit and third phase
remains inside the delta limit.
• REV 3 (all three phases)
All three phase currents decrease below the set delta limit.
V50/en M/A018 85
Below are simulated different fault scenarios:
Figure 5.23: Phase L1 forward
86 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.14 Intermittent transient earth fault protection I0INT> (67NI)
5.14 Intermittent transient earth fault

protection I0INT> (67NI)
NOTE: Voltage measurement mode contains direct U0 measurement.
The directional intermittent transient earth fault protection is used to

detect short intermittent transient faults in compensated cable
networks. The transient faults are self extinguished at some zero
crossing of the transient part of the fault current IFault and the fault
duration is typically only 0.1 ms – 1 ms. Such short intermittent faults
can not be correctly recognized by normal directional earth fault
function using only the fundamental frequency components of I0 and
U0.
Although a single transient fault usually self extinguishes within less
than one millisecond, in most cases a new fault happens when the
phase-to-earth voltage of the faulty phase has recovered
(Figure 5.26).
Figure 5.26: Typical phase to earth voltages, residual current of the faulty feeder
and the zero sequence voltage U0 during two transient earth faults in phase L1.
In this case the network is compensated.
Direction algorithm
The function is sensitive to the instantaneous sampled values of the
residual current and zero sequence voltage. The selected voltage
measurement mode has to include a direct U0 measurement.
V50/en M/A018 87
5.14 Intermittent transient earth fault protection I0INT> (67NI) 5 Protection functions
I0 pick-up sensitivity
The sampling time interval of the relay is 625 μs at 50 Hz (32
samples/cycle). The I0 current spikes can be quite short compared
to this sampling interval. Fortunately the current spikes in cable
networks are high and while the anti-alias filter of the relay is
attenuates the amplitude, the filter also makes the pulses wider.
Thus, when the current pulses are high enough, it is possible to
detect pulses, which have duration of less than twenty per cent of
the sampling interval. Although the measured amplitude can be only
a fraction of the actual peak amplitude it doesn't disturb the direction
detection, because the algorithm is more sensitive to the sign and
timing of the I0 transient than sensitive to the absolute amplitude of
the transient. Thus a fixed value is used as a pick up level for the I0.
Co-ordination with U0> back up protection

Especially in a fully compensated situation, the zero sequence voltage
back up protection stage U0> for the bus may not release between
consecutive faults and the U0> might finally do an unselective trip if
the intermittent transient stage I0INT> doesn't operate fast enough.
The actual operation time of the I0INT> stage is very dependent on
the behaviour of the fault and the intermittent time setting. To make
the co-ordination between U0> and I0INT> more simple, the start
signal of the transient stage I0INT> in an outgoing feeder can be used
to block the U0> backup protection.
Co-ordination with the normal directional earth fault protection

based on fundamental frequency signals
The intermittent transient earth fault protection stage I0INT> should
always be used together with the normal directional earth fault
protection stages I0φ>, I0φ>>. The transient stage I0INT> may in worst
case detect the start of a steady earth fault in wrong direction, but
will not trip because the peak value of a steady state sine wave I0
signal must also exceed the corresponding base frequency
component's peak value in order to make the I0INT> to trip.
The operation time of the transient stage I0INT> should be lower than
the settings of any directional earth fault stage to avoid any
unnecessary trip from the I0φ>, I0φ>> stages .The start signal of the
I0INT> stage can be also used to block I0φ>, I0φ>> stages of all paralell
feeders.
Auto reclosing
The start signal of any I0φ> stage initiating auto reclosing (AR) can
be used to block the I0INT> stage to avoid the I0INT> stage with a long
intermittent setting to interfere with the AR cycle in the middle of
discrimination time.
88 V50/en M/A018
Usually the I0INT> stage itself is not used to initiate any AR. For
transient faults the AR will not help, because the fault phenomena
itself already includes repeating self extinguishing.
Operation time, peak amount counter and intermittent time

co-ordination
Algorithm has three independently settable parameters: operation
delay, required amount of peaks and intermittent time. All
requirements need to be satisfied before stage issues trip signal.
There is also settable reset delay: to ensure that stage does not
release before circuit breaker has operated. Setting range for required
amount of peaks is 1 – 20 and the setting range for operational delay
is 0.02 – 300s. Reset delay setting range is 0.06 – 300s. Intermittent
time setting is 0.01 – 300s. If in example setting for peaks is set to
2 and setting for operation delay is set to 160ms and intermittent
time is set to 200ms then function starts calculating operation delay
from first peak and after second peak in 80ms peak amount criteria
is satisfied and when 160ms comes full operation time criteria is
satisfied and the stage issues trip (Figure 5.27). If second peak does
not come before operational delay comes full the stage is released
after intermittent time has come full. But if the second peak comes
after operation time has come full but still inside intermittent time
then trip is issued instantly (Figure 5.28). If intermittent time comes
full before operation delay comes full the stage is released
(Figure 5.29). There is a of couple limitations to avoid completely
incorrect settings. Algorithm assumes that peaks can’t come more
often than 10ms so if peak amount is set to 10 then operation delay
will not accept smaller value than 100ms and also if operational delay
is set to 40ms then it’s not possible to set higher peak amount setting
than 4. This is not fail proof but prohibits usage of that kind of settings
that can never be satisfied.
Figure 5.27: Set peak amount is satisfied and operation time comes full inside
intermittent time setting. Stage issues a trip.
V50/en M/A018 89
5.14 Intermittent transient earth fault protection I0INT> (67NI) 5 Protection functions
Figure 5.28: Peak amount is not satisfied when operation delay comes full but last
required peak comes during intermittent time. Stage issues instant trip when peak
amount comes satisfied.
Figure 5.29: Peak amount is satisfied but intermittent time comes full before
operation time comes full. Stage is released.
Setting groups
groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual inputs
(communication, logic) and manually. See Chapter 5.2 General
90 V50/en M/A018
Setting,
Operation delay
Peak amount
Figure 5.30: Block diagram of the directional intermittent transient earth fault stage
I0INT>.
Table 5.17: Parameters of the directional intermittent transient earth fault

stage I0INT> (67NI)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Io input Io1Peak I0 Connectors X:1-7, 8, 9 Set
On too. Automatically reset after a five minute timeout.
Io1 peak pu The detected I0 value according the parameter "In-
put" below.
Io2 peak
Uo % The measured U0 value.
U0N = 100 %
Direction mode Forward Setting between direction towards line or bus Set
Reverse
Uo> % U0 pick up level. U0N = 100 % Set
V50/en M/A018 91
5.15 Zero sequence voltage protection U0> (59N) 5 Protection functions

t> 0.04 – 300 s Operation delay setting Set
Min. peaks 1 – 20 Minimum number of peaks required Set
Reset 0.06 – 300 s Reset delay setting Set
Intrmt s Intermittent time. When the next fault occurs within Set
this time, the delay counting continues from the
previous value.

There is detailed information available of the eight latest detected
faults: Time stamp, U0 voltage, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 5.18: Recorded values of the directional intermittent transient earth
fault stage (8 latest faults) I0INT> (67NI)
Flt pu Maximum detected earth fault current
Uo % Max. U0 voltage during the fault
FWD peaks pcs Amouont of detected peaks to forward direction
REV peaks pcs Amouont of detected peaks to reverse direction
5.15 Zero sequence voltage protection U0>

(59N)
The zero sequence voltage protection is used as unselective backup
for earth faults and also for selective earth fault protections for motors
having a unit transformer between the motor and the busbar.
This function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component
of the zero sequence voltage. The attenuation of the third harmonic
is more than 60 dB. This is essential, because 3rd harmonics exist
between the neutral point and earth also when there is no earth fault.
Whenever the measured value exceeds the user's pick-up setting
of a particular stage, this stage picks up and a start signal is issued.
If the fault situation remains on longer than the user's operation time
delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
92 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.15 Zero sequence voltage protection U0> (59N)
Measuring the zero sequence voltage

The zero sequence voltage is either measured with three voltage
transformers (e.g. broken delta connection), one voltage transformer
between the motor's neutral point and earth or calculated from the
measured phase-to-neutral voltages according to the selected voltage
measurement mode (see Chapter 7.7 Voltage measurement modes):
• U0: The zero sequence voltage is measured with voltage
transformer(s) for example using a broken delta connection. The
setting values are relative to the VT0 secondary voltage defined
in configuration.
NOTE: The U0 signal must be connected according the connection diagram

(Figure 11.10) in order to get a correct polarization.
Two independent stages

There are two separately adjustable stages: U0> and U0>>. Both
stages can be configured for definite time (DT) operation
characteristic.
The zero sequence voltage function comprises two separately
adjustable zero sequence voltage stages (stage U0> and U0>>).
Setting groups
There are four settings groups available for both stages. Switching
Figure 5.31: Block diagram of the zero sequence voltage stages U0>, U0>>
V50/en M/A018 93
5.15 Zero sequence voltage protection U0> (59N) 5 Protection functions
Table 5.19: Parameters of the residual overvoltage stages U0>, U0>>

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
is a common flag for all stages and output relays, too.
On Automatically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
Uo %
The supervised value relative to Un/
Uo>, Uo>> % Set
Pick-up value relative to Un/
t>, t>> s Definite operation time. Set
For details of setting ranges, see Table 12.38, Table 12.39.

There are detailed information available of the eight latest faults:
Time stamp, fault voltage, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 5.20: Recorded values of the residual overvoltage stages U0>, U0>>
Flt %
Fault voltage relative to Un/
94 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.16 Thermal overload protection T> (49)
5.16 Thermal overload protection T> (49)

The thermal overload function protects the motor in the motor mode
or cables in the feeder mode against excessive heating.
Thermal model
The temperature is calculated using rms values of phase currents
and a thermal model according IEC 60255-8. The rms values are
calculated using harmonic components up to the 15th.
2
I 2 − IP
Trip time: t = τ ⋅ ln 2
I − a 2 , ȫ unit: second
Alarm: a = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE ⋅ alarm (Alarm 60% = 0.6)
Trip: a = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE
2
I
Release time: t = τ ⋅ Cτ ⋅ ln 2 P 2
a − I , ȫ unit: second
Trip release: a = 0.95 × k × I MODE
Start release: a = 0.95 × k × I MODE × alarm (Alarm 60% = 0.6)
T= Operation time
= Thermal time constant tau (Setting value)
ln = Natural logarithm function

I= Measured rms phase current (the max. value of
three phase currents)
Ip =
I = θ × k × I MODE
Preload current, P (If temperature
rise is 120% -> θ = 1.2). This parameter is the
memory of the algorithm and corresponds to the
actual temperature rise.
k= Overload factor (Maximum continuous current),
i.e. service factor.(Setting value)
kΘ = Ambient temperature factor (Permitted current due
to tamb).
IMODE = The rated current (IN or IMOT)
Cτ = Relay cooling time constant (Setting value)
V50/en M/A018 95
5.16 Thermal overload protection T> (49) 5 Protection functions
Time constant for cooling situation

If the motor's fan is stopped, the cooling will be slower than with an
active fan. Therefore there is a coefficient Cτ for thermal constant
available to be used as cooling time constant, when current is less
than 0.3 x IMOT.
Heat capacitance, service factor and ambient temperature

The trip level is determined by the maximum allowed continuous
current IMAX corresponding to the 100 % temperature rise ΘTRIP i.e.
the heat capacitance of the motor or cable. IMAX depends of the given
service factor k and ambient temperature ΘAMB and settings IMAX40
and IMAX70 according the following equation.
I MAX = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE
The value of ambient temperature compensation factor kΘ depends

on the ambient temperature ΘAMB and settings IMAX40 and IMAX70.
See Figure 5.32. Ambient temperature is not in use when kΘ = 1.
This is true when
• IMAX40 is 1.0
• Samb is “n/a” (no ambient temperature sensor)
• TAMB is +40 °C.
kQ AmbientTemperatureCompensation
1.2
IMAX40
1.0
0.8 IMAX70
0.6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
QAMB (°C)
Figure 5.32: Ambient temperature correction of the overload stage T>.
96 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.16 Thermal overload protection T> (49)
Example of a behaviour of the thermal model

Figure 5.32 shows an example of the thermal model behaviour. In
this example = 30 minutes, k = 1.06 and kΘ = 1 and the current
has been zero for a long time and thus the initial temperature rise is
0 %. At time = 50 minutes the current changes to 0.85 x IMODE and
the temperature rise starts to approach value (0.85/1.06)2 = 64 %
according the time constant. At time = 300 min, the temperature is
about stable, and the current increases to 5 % over the maximum
defined by the rated current and the service factor k. The temperature
rise starts to approach value 110 %. At about 340 minutes the
temperature rise is 100 % and a trip follows.
Initial temperature rise after restart

When the device is switched on, an initial temperature rise of 70 %
is used. Depending of the actual current, the calculated temperature
rise then starts to approach the final value.
Alarm function
The thermal overload stage is provided with a separately settable
alarm function. When the alarm limit is reached the stage activates
its start signal.
Figure 5.33: Example of the thermal model behaviour.
V50/en M/A018 97
5.16 Thermal overload protection T> (49) 5 Protection functions
Table 5.21: Parameters of the thermal overload stage T> (49)

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
Time hh:mm:ss Estimated time to trip
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. Set
This is a common flag for all stages and output
On relays, too. Automatically reset by a 5-minute
timeout.
T % Calculated temperature rise. Trip limit is 100 %. F
MaxRMS Arms Measured current. Highest of the three phases.
Imax A k x IMODE. Current corresponding to the 100 %
temperature rise.
k> xIMODE Allowed overload (service factor) Set
Alarm % Alarm level Set
tau min Thermal time constant Set
ctau xtau Coefficient for cooling time constant. Default = Set
1.0
kTamb xIMODE Ambient temperature corrected max. allowed
continuous current
Imax40 %IMODE Allowed load at Tamb +40 °C. Default = 100 %. Set
Imax70 %IMODE Allowed load at Tamb +70 °C. Set
Tamb °C Ambient temperature. Editable Samb=n/a. Default Set
= +40 °C
Samb Sensor for ambient temperature Set
n/a No sensor in use for Tamb
ExtAI1 – 16 External Analogue input 1 – 16
98 V50/en M/A018
5 Protection functions 5.17 Single-phase overvoltage protection U> (59)
5.17 Single-phase overvoltage protection U>

(59)
NOTE: Available when the voltage measurement mode is 1LL or 1LN.
The single-phase overvoltage function consists of three separately

adjustable overvoltage stages (stage U>, U>> and U>>>).
The device measures the fundamental frequency component of a
single phase-to-neutral (1LN) or a line-to-line (1LL) voltage. Then
the three-phase voltage calculation is done, assuming that all the
voltages are symmetrical, i.e. no zero sequence voltage is present.
The protection stages operate with definite time characteristics.
The function starts if the measured value exceeds the setting value.
If an overvoltage situation continues after the operation time has
elapsed, the function trips.
The overvoltage stages have a fixed start delay. If a delayed alarm
about a voltage fault is required, a settable start delay and trip time
can be obtained by combining two stages. See Figure 5.34. Both the
stages detect the overvoltage, but the start signals are ignored. The
trip signal of stage U> is used as an alarm signal, and the trip
information from stage U>> is used for the actual trip. The overvoltage
setting value for stage U>> has to be higher than the setting value
for stage U> to ensure an alarm before trip.
Overvoltage fault
U> start
ALARM
U> trip
U>> start
TRIP
U>> trip
Figure 5.34: Settable start delay is obtained by combining two protection stages
The U> stage has a settable release delay, which enables detecting
instantaneous faults. This means that the time counter of the
protection function does not reset immediately after the fault is
cleared, but resets only after the release delay has elapsed. If the
fault appears again before the delay time has elapsed, the delay
counter continues from the previous value. This means that the
function trips after a certain number of instantaneous faults.
Chapter 5.17 Single-phase overvoltage protection U> (59) shows
the functional block diagram of the overvoltage function stages U>,
U>> and U>>>.
V50/en M/A018 99
5.17 Single-phase overvoltage protection U> (59) 5 Protection functions
1vus
& Start
Um1 MAX > ts tr
Blocking
& Event
register
Trip
t
& Event
register
Setting Hysteresis Release Delay Enable

U>s delay events
Figure 5.35: Block diagram of the single-phase overvoltage stages U>, U>> and
U>>>
Table 5.22: Setting parameters of single-phase overvoltage stages U>, U>>,

U>>> (59)
U>, U>>, U>>> 50 – 150 (U>); % Un 120 (U>) Overvoltage setting
50 – 160 (U>>,U>>>) 130 (U>>, U>>>)

t>, t>>, t>>> 0.08 – 300.0 (U>, U>>); s 0.20 (U>) Definite operation time.
0.06 – 300.00 (U>>>) 0.10 (U>>,

U>>>)
ReleaseDly 0.06 – 300.0 s - Release delay [s] (only U>)
Hysteresis 0.1 – 20.0 % - Deadband (only U>)
For details of setting ranges, see Table 12.32, Table 12.33, Table 12.34.
Table 5.23: Measured and recorded values of single-phase overvoltage

stages U>, U>>, U>>> (59)
Measured value Umax V Maximum value of line voltages
Recorded values SCntr - Start counter (Start) reading
TCntr - Trip counter (Trip) reading
Flt % Un The max. fault value
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set oper-
ating time; 100% = tripping
100 V50/en M/A018

5 Protection functions 5.18 Single-phase undervoltage protection U< (27)
5.18 Single-phase undervoltage protection

U< (27)
NOTE: Available when the voltage measurement mode is 1LL or 1LN.
The single-phase undervoltage function consists of three separately

adjustable undervoltage stages (stage U<, U<< and U<<<).
The device measures the fundamental frequency component of a
single phase-to-neutral (1LN) or a line-to-line (1LL) voltage. Then
the three-phase voltage calculation is done, assuming that all the
voltages are symmetrical, i.e. no zero sequence voltage is present.
The protection stages operate with definite time characteristics.
The function starts, if the measured or calculated line-to-line voltage
drops below the setting value. If the undervoltage situation continues
after the start delay has elapsed, the function trips.
The undervoltage stage U< has a settable release delay, which
enables detecting instantaneous faults. This means that the time
counter of the protection function does not reset immediately after
the fault is cleared, but resets only after the release delay has
elapsed. If the fault appears again before the delay time has elapsed,
the trip counter continues from the previous fault value. This means
that the function trips after a certain number of instantaneous faults.
The undervoltage function can be blocked with an external digital
signal for example if the secondary voltage of the measuring
transformers disappears (e.g. fuse failure). The undervoltage function
can also be blocked with an internal blocking signal, which is defined
during the parameterisation. Further, the function can be blocked
with a separate NoCmp setting. With this setting, all the protection
stages are blocked even when the actual values for all the phases
fall below the set value.
1vup
Um1 MAX
> & Start
ts tr
Blocking
& Event
register
Trip
t
& Event
register
NoCmp Setting Hysteresis Release Delay Enable

U<s delay events
Figure 5.36: Block diagram of the single-phase undervoltage stages U<, U<< and
U<<<
V50/en M/A018 101

5.19 Magnetishing inrush If2 > (68F2) 5 Protection functions
Table 5.24: Setting parameters of single-phase undervoltage stages U<, U<<,

U<<< (27)
U<, U<<, U<<< 20 – 120 % Un 80 (U<) Undervoltage setting
70 (U<<, U<<<)
t<, t<<, t<<< 0.08 – 300.00 s 20.00 (U<) Definite operation time.
0.06 – 300.00 2.00 (U<<, U<<<)

NoCmp 0 – 80 % Un 10 Self-blocking value
ReleaseDly 0.06 – 300.0 s - Release delay (only U<)
Hysteresis 0.1 – 20.0 % - Deadband (only U<)
For details of setting ranges, see Table 12.35, Table 12.36, Table 12.37.
Table 5.25: Measured and recorded values of single-phase undervoltage

stages U<, U<<, U<<< (27)
Measured value Umin V Minimum value of line voltages
Recorded values SCntr - Start counter (Start) reading
TCntr - Trip counter (Trip) reading
Flt % Un The min. fault value
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set operating
time; 100% = tripping
5.19 Magnetishing inrush If2 > (68F2)

This stage is mainly used to block other stages. The ratio between
the second harmonic component and the fundamental frequency
component is measured on all the phase currents. When the ratio
in any phase exceeds the setting value, the stage gives a start signal.
After a settable delay, the stage gives a trip signal.
The start and trip signals can be used for blocking the other stages.
The trip delay is irrelevant if only the start signal is used for blocking.
The trip delay of the stages to be blocked must be more than 60 ms
to ensure a proper blocking.
102 V50/en M/A018

5 Protection functions 5.19 Magnetishing inrush If2 > (68F2)
2ndHarm
Im1
&
Im2
Im3
MAX > ts tr
Start
Block
& Register
event
Trip
t
& Register
event
Setting Delay Enable events

2.Harm
Figure 5.37: Block diagram of the magnetishing inrush stage.
Table 5.26: Setting parameters of magnetishing inrush blocking (68F2)

If2> 10 – 100 % 10 Setting value If2/Ifund
t_f2 0.05 – 300.0 s 0.05 Definite operating time
Table 5.27: Measured and recorded values of magnetishing inrush blocking

(68F2)
Measured values IL1H2. % 2. harmonic of IL1, proportional to the fundamental value of
IL1
IL2H2. % 2. harmonic of IL2
Recorded values Flt % The max. fault value
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set operating time; 100%
= tripping
V50/en M/A018 103

5.20 Transformer over exicitation If5> (68F5) 5 Protection functions
5.20 Transformer over exicitation If5> (68F5)

Overexiting for example a transformer creates odd harmonics. This
over exicitation stage can be used detect overexcitation. This stage
can also be used to block some other stages.
The ratio between the over exicitation component and the
fundamental frequency component is measured on all the phase
currents. When the ratio in any phase exceeds the setting value, the
stage gives a start signal. After a settable delay, the stage gives a
trip signal.
The trip delay of the stages to be blocked must be more than 60 ms
to ensure a proper blocking.
Table 5.28: Setting parameters of over exicitation blocking (68F5)
If5> 10 – 100 % 10 Setting value If5/Ifund
t_f5 0.05 – 300.0 s 0.05 Definite operating time
Table 5.29: Measured and recorded values of over exicitation blocking (68F5)
Measured values IL1H5. % 5. harmonic of IL1, proportional to the fundamental
value of IL1
Recorded values Flt % The max. fault value
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set operating time;
100% = tripping
104 V50/en M/A018

5 Protection functions 5.21 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF)
5.21 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP

(50BF)
The circuit breaker failure protection can be used to trip any upstream
circuit breaker (CB), if the fault has not disappeared within a given
time after the initial trip command. A different output contact of the
device must be used for this backup trip.
The operation of the circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) is based
on the supervision of the signal to the selected trip relay and the time
the fault remains on after the trip command.
If this time is longer than the operating time of the CBFP stage, the
CBFP stage activates another output relay, which will remain
activated until the primary trip relay resets.
The CBFP stage is supervising all the protection stages using the
same selected trip relay, since it supervises the control signal of this
device. See Chapter 8.5 Output matrix
Table 5.30: Parameters of the circuit breaker failure stage CBFP (50BF)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is Set
Cbrelay The supervised output relay*). Set
1 Relay T1
2 Relay T2
t> s Definite operation time. Set
*) This setting is used by the circuit breaker condition monitoring, too. See Chapter 6.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring.

There are detailed information available of the eight latest faults:
Time stamp and elapsed delay.
V50/en M/A018 105

5.22 Programmable stages (99) 5 Protection functions
Table 5.31: Recorded values of the circuit breaker failure stage (8 latest
faults) CBFP (50BF)
5.22 Programmable stages (99)

For special applications the user can built own protection stages by
selecting the supervised signal and the comparison mode.
The following parameters are available:
• Priority
If operation times less than 80 milliseconds are needed select
10 ms. For operation times under one second 20 ms is
recommended. For longer operation times and THD signals 100
ms is recommended.
• Coupling A
The name of the supervised signal in “>” and “<” modes (see
table below). Also the name of the supervised signal 1 in “Diff”
and “AbsDiff” modes.
• Coupling B
The name of the supervised signal 2 in “Diff” and “AbsDiff”
modes.
• Compare condition
Compare mode. ‘>’ for over or ‘<’ for under comparison, “Diff”
and “AbsDiff” for comparing Coupling A and Coupling B.
• Pick-up
Limit of the stage. The available setting range and the unit
depend on the selected signal.
• Operation delay
Definite time operation delay
• Hysteresis
Dead band (hysteresis)
• No Compare limit for mode <
Only used with compare mode under (‘<’). This is the limit to start
the comparison. Signal values under NoCmp are not regarded
as fault.
106 V50/en M/A018

5 Protection functions 5.22 Programmable stages (99)
Table 5.32: Available signals to be supervised by the programmable stages

IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase currents
Io Residual current input
U12, U23, U31 Line-to-line voltages
UL1, UL2, UL3 Phase-to-ground voltages
Uo Zero sequence voltage
f Frequency
IoCalc Phasor sum IL1 + IL2 + IL3
I1 Positive sequence current
I2 Negative sequence current
I2/I1 Relative negative sequence current
I2/In Negative sequence current in pu
IL Average (IL1 + IL2 + IL3) / 3
TanFii Tangent φ [= tan(arccosφ)]
Prms Active power rms value
Qrms Reactive power rms value
Srms Apparent powre rms value
THDIL1 Total harmonic distortion of IL1
THDUa Total harmonic distortion of input UA
IL1RMS IL1 RMS for average sampling
VAI1, VAI2, VAI3, VAI4, VAI5 Virtual analog inputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (GOOSE)
Eight independent stages

The device has eight independent programmable stages. Each
programmable stage can be enabled or disabled to fit the intended
application.
Setting groups
groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual inputs (mimic
display, communication, logic) and manually.
There are four identical stages available with independent setting
parameters.
See Chapter 5.2 General features of protection stages for more
details.
V50/en M/A018 107

5.22 Programmable stages (99) 5 Protection functions
Table 5.33: Parameters of the programmable stages PrgN (99)

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
common flag for all stages and output relays, too. Automat-
On ically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
Link See Table 5.32 Name for the supervised signal Set
See Table 5.32 Value of the supervised signal
Cmp Mode of comparison Set
> Over protection
< Under protection
Diff Difference
AbsDiff Absolut difference
Pickup Pick up value scaled to primary level
Pickup pu Pick up setting in pu Set
t s Definite operation time. Set
Hyster % Dead band setting Set
NoCmp pu Minimum value to start under comparison. (Mode='<') Set

stamp, fault value and elapsed delay.
Table 5.34: Recorded values of the programmable stages PrgN (99)
Flt pu Fault value
108 V50/en M/A018

5 Protection functions 5.23 Arc fault protection (optional)
5.23 Arc fault protection (optional)
5.23.1 2S+BIO
The arc option card is inserted in the upper option card slot in the
back of the device. The card is fastened to the relay with two screws.
The optional arc protection card includes two arc sensor channels.
The arc sensors are connected to the terminals 5 – 6 and 7 – 8.
The arc information can be transmitted and/or received through digital
input and output channels BIO. The output signal is 48 V dc when
active. The input signal has to be 18 – 48 V dc to be activated.
Connections:
1 Binary output +
2 Binary output GND
3 Binary input +
4 Binary input GND
5–6 Arc sensor 1 (VA 1 DA)
7–8 Arc sensor 2 (VA 1 DA)
The GND must be connected together between the GND of the

connected devices.
The binary output of the arc option card may be activated by one or
both of the connected arc sensors, or by the binary input. The
connection between the inputs and the output is selectable via the
output matrix of the device. The binary output can be connected to
an arc binary input of another VAMP protection relay or arc protection
system.
Binary input
The binary input (BI) on the arc option card (see Chapter 11.6 Arc
protection card C = Arc (2 x Arc sensor + BIO)) can be used to get
the light indication from another relay to build selective arc protection
systems.
The binary input (BI) signal can also be connected to any of the
output relays, BO, indicators etc. offered by the output matrix (see
Chapter 8.4 Function keys / F1 & F2). BI is a dry input for 48 Vdc
signal from binary outputs of other VAMP relays or dedicated arc
protection devices by VAMP.
V50/en M/A018 109

5.23 Arc fault protection (optional) 5 Protection functions
Binary output
The binary output (BO) on the arc option card (see Chapter 11.6 Arc
protection card C = Arc (2 x Arc sensor + BIO)) can be used to give
the light indication signal or any other signal or signals to another
relay's binary input to build selective arc protection systems.
Selection of the BO connected signal(s) is done with the output matrix
(see Chapter 8.4 Function keys / F1 & F2). BO is an internally wetted
48 Vdc signal for BI of other VAMP relays or dedicated arc protection
devices by VAMP.
Delayed light indication signal

Relay output matrix has a delayed light indication output signal
(Delayed Arc L>) available for building selective arc protection
systems. Any light source combination and a delay can be configured
starting from 0.01 s to 0.15 s. The resulting signal is available in the
output matrix to be connected to BO, output relays etc.
Pick up scaling
The per unit (pu) values for pick up setting are based on the current
transformer values.
ArcI>: 1 pu = 1 x IN = rated phase current CT value
ArcI0>: 1 pu = 1 x I0N = rated residual current CT value for input I0.
Table 5.35: Parameters of arc protection stages ArcI>, ArcI0>
(50ARC/50NARC)
Start Light detected according ArcIN F
Trip Light and overcurrent detected F

LCntr Cumulative light indication counter. S1, S2 or BI. C
SCntr Cumulative light indication counter for the selected in- C
puts according parameter ArcIN
common flag for all stages and output relays, too.
- Value of the supervised signal
ILmax Stage ArcI>
Io> Stage ArcI0>

ArcI> pu Pick up setting xIN Set
ArcIo> Pick up setting x I0N
110 V50/en M/A018


ArcIn Light indication source selection Set
– No sensor selected
S1 Sensor 1 at terminals X6:5 – 6
S1/S2 Sensor in terminals 1 and 2
BI Terminals X6:1 – 4
S1/BI Sensor 1 and BI in use
S1/S2/BI Sensor 1, 2 and BI in use
Delayed light signal output
Ldly s Delay for delayed light output signal Set
LdlyCn Light indication source selection Set
– No sensor selected
S1/S2 Sensor in terminals 1 and 2
BI Terminals X6:1 – 4
S1/S2/BI Sensor 1, 2 and BI in use
For details of setting ranges, see Chapter 12.3.9 Arc fault protection (option).

stamp, fault type, fault value, load current before the fault and elapsed
delay.
Table 5.36: Recorded values of the arc protection stages
Type pu Fault type value. Only for ArcI> stage.
Flt pu Fault value
Load pu Pre fault current. Only for ArcI> stage.
V50/en M/A018 111

5.23.2 3S+BIO
back of the device. The card is fastened to the relay with two screws.
The optional arc protection card includes three arc sensor channels
for light detection and fast overcurrent detection for combined phase
currents and Io. The arc sensors are connected to the terminals 6 –
7, 8 9, and 10 – 11.
1 Binary output +
2 Binary output GND
3 Binary input +
4 Binary input GND
5 no connection
6-7 Arc sensor 1 (VA 1 DA)
When devices are connected together using binary channel the

ground wires must also be connected.
The option card has two fast arc outputs: the binary output and direct
control of relay T1. The behaviour of the arc protection is determined
by the 3S+BIO output matrix that is described in more detail later in
this chapter.
Binary input
The binary input (BI) on the arc option card can be used to get either
light or current indication from another relay to build selective arc
protection systems. The BI signal can also be routed to BO or T1
from 3S+BIO output matrix. BI is a dry input for signal from binary
outputs of other VAMP relays or dedicated arc protection devices
by VAMP.
Binary output
The binary output (BO) on the arc option card (see Chapter 11.6 Arc
protection card C = Arc (2 x Arc sensor + BIO)) can be used to give
the light indication signal or any other signal or signals to another
relay's binary input to build selective arc protection systems. Selection
of the BO connected signal(s) is done with the 3S+BIO output matrix.
BO is an internally wetted 30 Vdc signal for BI of other VAMP relays
or dedicated arc protection devices by VAMP.
112 V50/en M/A018

Pick up scaling for 3S+BIO arc current

The per unit (pu) values for pick up setting are based on the current
transformer values.
ArcI>: 1 pu = 1xIN = rated phase current CT value
ArcI0>: 1 pu = 1xI0N = rated residual current CT value for input
I0.
The greyed current values indicate the corresponding actual current

values after scaling factors from the “scaling”-menu have been
applied.
3S+BIO output matrix

The functionality of the 3S+BIO option card is controlled mostly by
the card’s dedicated output matrix (Figure 5.38). All the connections
made in this matrix are a lot faster than the device’s normal output
matrix connections and are handled separately from the relay’s other
processes.
Figure 5.38: 3S+BIO output matrix
In the matrix all inputs are on left hand side and can be connected
to outputs on top of each column by placing dots to the matrix. It
should be noted that “Output latch” isn’t a real input. Instead, a dot
in that line indicates that the corresponding output is latched on
activation.
V50/en M/A018 113

Arc events
There are number of events that can be set to trigger on changes in
arc protection signals. For each signal there is separately selectable
on and off event. Those events can be enabled or disabled from the
3S+BIO event matrix shown in Figure 5.39.
Figure 5.39: 3S+BIO event enabling
When triggered the event shows up normally in the device’s event

buffer along with time stamp.
114 V50/en M/A018

5 Protection functions 5.24 Inverse time operation
5.24 Inverse time operation

The inverse time operation - i.e. inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
type of operation - is available for several protection functions. The
common principle, formulae and graphic representations of the
available inverse delay types are described in this chapter.
Inverse delay means that the operation time depends on the
measured real time process values during a fault. For example with
an overcurrent stage using inverse delay a bigger a fault current
gives faster operation. The alternative to inverse delay is definite
delay. With definite delay a preset time is used and the operation
time does not depend on the size of a fault.
Stage specific inverse delay

Some protection functions have their own specific type of inverse
delay. Details of these dedicated inverse delays are described with
the appropriate protection function.
Operation modes
There are three operation modes to use the inverse time
characteristics:
• Standard delays
Using standard delay characteristics by selecting a curve family
(IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, RI) and a delay type (Normal inverse, Very
inverse etc). See Chapter 5.24.1 Standard inverse delays IEC,
IEEE, IEEE2, RI.
• Standard delay formulae with free parameters
selecting a curve family (IEC, IEEE, IEEE2) and defining one's
own parameters for the selected delay formula. This mode is
activated by setting delay type to ‘Parameters’, and then editing
the delay function parameters A – E. See Chapter 5.24.2 Free
parameterization using IEC, IEEE and IEEE2 equations.
• Fully programmable inverse delay characteristics
Building the characteristics by setting 16 [current, time] points.
The relay interpolates the values between given points with 2nd
degree polynomials. This mode is activated by setting curve
family to ‘PrgN’'. There are maximum three different
programmable curves available at the same time. Each
programmed curve can be used by any number of protection
stages. See Chapter 5.24.3 Programmable inverse time curves.
Local panel graph

The device will show a graph of the currently used inverse delay on
the local panel display. Up and down keys can be used for zooming.
Also the delays at 20 x ISET, 4 x ISET and 2 x ISET are shown.
V50/en M/A018 115

5.24 Inverse time operation 5 Protection functions
Inverse time setting error signal

If there are any errors in the inverse delay configuration the
appropriate protection stage will use definite time delay.
There is a signal ‘Setting Error’ available in output matrix, which
indicates three different situations:
1. Settings are currently changed with VAMPSET or local panel,
and there is temporarily an illegal combination of
curve/delay/points. For example if previous settings were IEC/NI
and then curve family is changed to IEEE, the setting error will
active, because there is no NI type available for IEEE curves.
After changing valid delay type for IEEE mode (for example MI),
the ‘Setting Error’ signal will release.
2. There are errors in formula parameters A – E, and the device is
not able to build the delay curve
3. There are errors in the programmable curve configuration and
the device is not able to interpolate values between the given
points.
Limitations
The maximum measured secondary phase current is 50 x IN and the
maximum directly measured earth fault current is 10 x I0N for residual
current input. The full scope of inverse delay curves goes up to 20
times the setting. At high setting the maximum measurement
capability limits the scope of inverse curves according the following
table.
Current input Maximum measured Maximum secondary scaled set-
secondary current ting enabling inverse delay times
up to full 20x setting
IL1, IL2, IL3 and I0Calc 250 A 12.5 A
I0 = 5 A 50 A 2.5 A
I0 = 1 A 10 A 0.5 A
I01 = 0.2 A 2A 0.1 A
I0 = 0.2 A
116 V50/en M/A018

1. Example of limitation
CT = 750 / 5
Application mode is Feeder (selection is available only in VAMP
52)
CT0= 100 / 1 (cable CT is used for residual current)
The CT0 is connected to a 1 A terminals of input I0.
For overcurrent stage I> the table above gives 12.5 A. Thus the
maximum setting for I> stage giving full inverse delay range is
12.5 A / 5 A = 2.5 xIN = 1875 APrimary.
For earth fault stage I0> the table above gives 0.5 A. Thus the
maximum setting for I0> stage giving full inverse delay range is
0.5 A / 1 A = 0.5 xI0N = 50 APrimary.
2. Example of limitation
CT = 750 / 5
Application mode is Motor (selection is available only in VAMP
52)
Rated current of the motor = 600 A
I0Calc (= IL1 + IL2 + IL3) is used for residual current
At secondary level the rated motor current is 600 / 750*5 = 4 A
For overcurrent stage I> the table above gives 12.5 A. Thus the
maximum setting giving full inverse delay range is 12.5 A / 4 A
= 3.13 x IMOT = 1875 APrimary.
For earth fault stage I0> the table above gives 12.5 A. Thus the
maximum setting for I0> stage giving full inverse delay range is
12.5 A / 5 A = 2.5 x I0N = 1875 APrimary.
5.24.1 Standard inverse delays IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, RI

The available standard inverse delays are divided in four categories
IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI called delay curve families. Each category
of family contains a set of different delay types according the following
table.

The inverse time setting error signal will be activated, if the delay
category is changed and the old delay type doesn't exist in the new
category. See Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation for more details.
V50/en M/A018 117

Limitations
The minimum definite time delay start latest, when the measured
value is twenty times the setting. However, there are limitations at
high setting values due to the measurement range. Chapter 5.24
Inverse time operation for more details.
Table 5.37: Available standard delay families and the available delay types
within each family.
Delay type Curve family
DT IEC IEEE IEEE2 RI
DT Definite time X
NI Normal inverse X X
VI Very inverse X X X
EI Extremely inverse X X X
LTI Long time inverse X X
LTEI Long time extremely inverse X
LTVI Long time very inverse X
MI Moderately inverse X X
STI Short time inverse X
STEI Short time extremely inverse X
RI Old ASEA type X
RXIDG Old ASEA type X
IEC inverse time operation

The operation time depends on the measured value and other
parameters according Equation 5.3. Actually this equation can only
be used to draw graphs or when the measured value I is constant
during the fault. A modified version is implemented in the relay for
real time usage.
t = Operation delay in seconds
Equation 5.3:
k = User’s multiplier
kA I = Measured value
t= B
 I  IPICKUP = User’s pick up setting
  − 1
 I PICKUP  A, B = Constants parameters according Table 5.38.
There are three different delay types according IEC 60255-3, Normal
inverse (NI), Extremely inverse (EI), Very inverse (VI) and a VI
extension. Additional there is a de facto standard Long time inverse
(LTI).
118 V50/en M/A018

Table 5.38: Constants for IEC inverse delay equation

Delay type Parameter
A B
NI Normal inverse 0.14 0.02
EI Extremely inverse 80 2
VI Very inverse 13.5 1
LTI Long time inverse 120 1
Example for Delay type "Normal inverse (NI)":

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu (constant current)
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.14
B = 0.02
0.50 ⋅ 0.14
t= 0.02
= 5 .0
4
  −1
2
The operation time in this example will be 5 seconds. The same

result can be read from Figure 5.40.
Figure 5.40: IEC normal inverse delay. Figure 5.41: IEC extremely inverse delay.
V50/en M/A018 119

Figure 5.42: IEC very inverse delay. Figure 5.43: IEC long time inverse delay.
IEEE/ANSI inverse time operation

There are three different delay types according IEEE Std
C37.112-1996 (MI, VI, EI) and many de facto versions according
Table 5.39. The IEEE standard defines inverse delay for both trip
and release operations. However, in the VAMP relay only the trip
time is inverse according the standard but the release time is
constant.
The operation delay depends on the measured value and other
real time usage.
Equation 5.4:
 
  I = Measured value
 A 
t=k  C
+ B IPICKUP = User’s pick up setting
  I  − 1 
  I PICKUP   A,B,C = Constant parameter according Table 5.39.
 
120 V50/en M/A018

Table 5.39: Constants for IEEE/ANSI inverse delay equation

A B C
LTI Long time inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02
LTVI Long time very inverse 28.55 0.712 2
LTEI Long time extremely inverse 64.07 0.250 2
MI Moderately inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02
VI Very inverse 19.61 0.491 2
EI Extremely inverse 28.2 0.1217 2
STI Short time inverse 0.16758 0.11858 0.02
STEI Short time extremely inverse 1.281 0.005 2
Example for Delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.0515
B = 0.114
C = 0.02
 
 
0.0515
t = 0.50 ⋅  + 0 .1140  = 1.9
  4  0.02 
  −1 
  2  
The operation time in this example will be 1.9 seconds. The same
V50/en M/A018 121

Figure 5.44: ANSI/IEEE long time inverse delay Figure 5.45: ANSI/IEEE long time very inverse delay
Figure 5.46: ANSI/IEEE long time extremely inverse Figure 5.47: ANSI/IEEE moderately inverse delay
delay
122 V50/en M/A018

Figure 5.48: ANSI/IEEE short time inverse delay Figure 5.49: ANSI/IEEE short time extremely inverse
delay
IEEE2 inverse time operation

Before the year 1996 and ANSI standard C37.112 microprocessor
relays were using equations approximating the behaviour of various
induction disc type relays. A quite popular approximation is
Equation 5.5, which in VAMP relays is called IEEE2. Another name
could be IAC, because the old General Electric IAC relays have been
modeled using the same equation.
There are four different delay types according Table 5.40. The old
electromechanical induction disc relays have inverse delay for both
trip and release operations. However, in VAMP relays only the trip
time is inverse the release time being constant.
The operation delay depends on the measured value and other
real time usage.
V50/en M/A018 123

Equation 5.5:
 
 
 B D E 
t = k A + + 2
+ 3
 I 
  − C   I − C   I


− C  
  I PICKUP  
   I PICKUP   I PICKUP  

I = Measured value
IPICKUP = User’s pick up setting
A, B, C, D = Constant parameter according Table 5.40.
Table 5.40: Constants for IEEE2 inverse delay equation
A B C D E
MI Moderately inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8 -0.08 0.1271
NI Normally inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3 -0.1899 9.1272
VI Very inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.34 -0.284 4.0505
EI Extremely inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5 3.0094 0.7222
Example for Delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.1735
B = 0.6791
C = 0.8
D = -0.08
E = 0.127
 
 
 0.6791 − 0.08 0.127 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.1735 + + 2
+ 3
= 0.38
 4  4   4  
  − 0. 8   − 0. 8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2  
124 V50/en M/A018

Figure 5.50: IEEE2 moderately inverse delay Figure 5.51: IEEE2 normal inverse delay
Figure 5.52: IEEE2 very inverse delay Figure 5.53: IEEE2 extremely inverse delay
V50/en M/A018 125

RI and RXIDG type inverse time operation

These two inverse delay types have their origin in old ASEA
(nowadays ABB) earth fault relays.
The operation delay of types RI and RXIDG depends on the
measured value and other parameters according Equation 5.6 and
Equation 5.7. Actually these equations can only be used to draw
graphs or when the measured value I is constant during the fault.
Modified versions are implemented in the relay for real time usage.
Equation 5.6: RI Equation 5.7: RXIDG
k I
t RI = t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln
0.236 k I PICKUP
0.339 −
 I 
 
 I PICKUP 

I = Measured value
IPICKUP = User’s pick up setting
Example for Delay type RI

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
0.5
t RI = = 2.3
0.236
0.339 −
4
 
2
Example for Delay type RXIDG

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
4
t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln = 3.9
0.5 ⋅ 2
126 V50/en M/A018

Figure 5.54: Inverse delay of type RI. Figure 5.55: Inverse delay of type RXIDG.
5.24.2 Free parameterization using IEC, IEEE and

IEEE2 equations
This mode is activated by setting delay type to ‘Parameters’, and
then editing the delay function constants, i.e. the parameters A – E.
The idea is to use the standard equations with one’s own constants
instead of the standardized constants as in the previous chapter.
Example for GE-IAC51 delay type inverse:
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.2078
B = 0.8630
C = 0.8000
D = - 0.4180
E = 0.1947
V50/en M/A018 127

 
 
 0.8630 − 0.4180 0.1947 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.2078 + + 2
+ 3
= 0.37
 4  4   4  
  − 0.8   − 0.8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2  
The operation time in this example will be 0.37 seconds.

The resulting time/current characteristic of this example matches
quite well with the characteristic of the old electromechanical IAC51
induction disc relay.

The inverse time setting error signal will become active, if
interpolation with the given parameters is not possible. See
Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation for more details.
Limitations
high setting values due to the measurement range. See Chapter 5.24
5.24.3 Programmable inverse time curves

Only with VAMPSET, requires rebooting.
The [current, time] curve points are programmed using VAMPSET
PC program. There are some rules for defining the curve points:
• configuration must begin from the topmost line
• line order must be as follows: the smallest current (longest
operation time) on the top and the largest current (shortest
operation time) on the bottom
• all unused lines (on the bottom) should be filled with [1.00 0.00s]
Here is an example configuration of curve points:
Point Current I/IPICKUP Operation delay
1 1.00 10.00 s
2 2.00 6.50 s
3 5.00 4.00 s
4 10.00 3.00 s
5 20.00 2.00 s
6 40.00 1.00 s
7 1.00 0.00 s
8 1.00 0.00 s
9 1.00 0.00 s
128 V50/en M/A018

Point Current I/IPICKUP Operation delay

10 1.00 0.00 s
11 1.00 0.00 s
12 1.00 0.00 s
13 1.00 0.00 s
14 1.00 0.00 s
15 1.00 0.00 s
16 1.00 0.00 s

The inverse time setting error signal will be activated, if interpolation
with the given points fails. See Chapter 5.24 Inverse time operation
for more details.
Limitations
high setting values due to the measurement range. See Chapter 5.24
V50/en M/A018 129

6 Supporting functions
6 Supporting functions
6.1 Event log

Event log is a buffer of event codes and time stamps including date
and time. For example each start-on, start-off, trip-on or trip-off of
any protection stage has a unique event number code. Such a code
and the corresponding time stamp is called an event.
As an example of information included with a typical event a
programmable stage trip event is shown in the following table.
EVENT Description Local panel Communication
protocols
Code: 01E02 Channel 1, event 2 Yes Yes
I> trip on Event text Yes No
2.7 x In Fault value Yes No
2007-01-31 Date Yes Yes
08:35:13.413 Time Yes Yes
Type: 1-N, 2-N, 3-N Fault type Yes No
Events are the major data for a SCADA system. SCADA systems
are reading events using any of the available communication
protocols. Event log can also be scanned using the front panel or
using VAMPSET. With VAMPSET the events can be stored to a file
especially in case the relay is not connected to any SCADA system.
Only the latest event can be read when using communication
protocols or VAMPSET. Every reading increments the internal read
pointer to the event buffer. (In case of communication interruptions,
the latest event can be reread any number of times using another
parameter.) On the local panel scanning the event buffer back and
forth is possible.
Event enabling/masking
In case of an uninteresting event, it can be masked, which prevents
the particular event(s) to be written in the event buffer. As a default
there is room for 200 latest events in the buffer. Event buffer size
can be modified from 50 to 2000.
Modification can be done in “Local panel conf” –menu.
Indication screen (popup screen) can also be enabled in this same
menu when VAMPSET –setting tool is used. The oldest one will be
overwritten, when a new event does occur. The shown resolution of
a time stamp is one millisecond, but the actual resolution depends
of the particular function creating the event. For example most
protection stages create events with 5ms, 10 ms or 20 ms resolution.
The absolute accuracy of all time stamps depends on the time
130 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.1 Event log
synchronizing of the relay. See Chapter 6.7 System clock and

synchronization for system clock synchronizing.
Event buffer overflow
The normal procedure is to poll events from the device all the time.
If this is not done then the event buffer could reach its limits. In such
case the oldest event is deleted and the newest displayed with OVF
code in HMI.
Table 6.1: Setting parameters for events
Parameter Value Description Note
Count Number of events
ClrEn - Clear event buffer Set
Clear
Order Old-New Order of the event buffer for local display Set
New-Old
FVSca Scaling of event fault value Set
PU Per unit scaling
Pri Primary scaling
Display On Indication dispaly is enabled Set
Alarms Off No indication display

FORMAT OF EVENTS ON THE LOCAL DISPLAY
Code: CHENN CH = event channel, NN=event code
Event description Event channel and code in plain text
yyyy-mm-dd Date
(for available date formats, see Chapter 6.7 System clock and synchronization)
hh:mm:ss.nnn Time
V50/en M/A018 131

6.2 Disturbance recorder 6 Supporting functions
6.2 Disturbance recorder

The disturbance recorder can be used to record all the measured
signals, that is, currents, voltage and the status information of digital
inputs (DI) and digital outputs (DO).
The digital inputs include also the arc protection signals S1, S2, BI
and BO, if the optional arc protection is available.
Triggering the recorder
The recorder can be triggered by any start or trip signal from any
protection stage or by a digital input. The triggering signal is selected
in the output matrix (vertical signal DR). The recording can also be
triggered manually. All recordings are time stamped.
Reading recordings
The recordings can be uploaded, viewed and analysed with the
VAMPSET program. The recording is in COMTRADE format. This
also means that other programs can be used to view and analyse
the recordings made by the relay.
For more details, please see a separate VAMPSET manual.
Number of channels
At the maximum, there can be 12 recordings, and the maximum
selection of channels in one recording 12 (limited in wave form) and
digital inputs reserve one channel (includes all the inputs). Also the
digital outputs reserve one channel (includes all the outputs). If digital
inputs and outputs are recorded, there will be still 10 channels left
for analogue waveforms.
Table 6.2: Disturbance recorder waveform

Available for waveform
Channel Description Voltage measurement mode
1LN 1LL U0
IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current Yes Yes Yes
Io1, Io2 Measured residual current Yes Yes Yes
U12 Line-to-line voltage - Yes (* -
U23 Line-to-line voltage - - -
U31 Line-to-line voltage - - -
132 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.2 Disturbance recorder
Available for waveform

Channel Description Voltage measurement mode
1LN 1LL U0
UL1 Phase-to-neutral voltage Yes (* - -
UL2 Phase-to-neutral voltage - - -
UL3 Phase-to-neutral voltage - - -
Uo Zero sequence voltage - - Yes (*
f Frequency - - -
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power - - -
P.F. Power factor - - -
CosFii cosφ - - -
IoCalc Phasor sum Io = (IL1+IL2+IL3)/3 - - -
I1 Positive sequence current - - -
I2 Negative sequence current - - -
I2/I1 Relative current unbalance - - -
I2/Imode Current unbalance [xImode] - - -
U1 Positive sequence voltage - - -
U2 Negative sequence voltage - - -
U2/U1 Relative voltage unbalance - - -
IL Average (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)/3 - - -
Uphase Average (UL1 + UL2 + UL3) / 3 - - -
Uline Average (U12 + U23 + U31) / 3 - - -
DO Digital outputs Yes Yes Yes
DI Digital inputs Yes Yes Yes
TanFii tanφ - - -
THDIL1 Total harmonic distortion of IL1 - - -
THDUa Total harmonic distortion of Ua - - -
THDUb Total harmonic distortion of Ub - - -
THDUc Total harmonic distortion of Uc - - -
DI_2 Digital inputs 21 – 32 - - -
Prms Active power rms value - - -
Qrms Reactive power rms value - - -
Srms Apparent power rms value - - -
IL1RMS IL1 RMS for average sampling - - -
IL1Rem IL1 Remote current - - -
* Not in VAMP 50
V50/en M/A018 133

Table 6.3: Disturbance recorder parameters

Mode Behavior in memory full situation: Set
Saturated No more recordings are accepted
Overflow The oldest recorder will be overwritten
SR Sample rate Set
32/cycle Waveform
16/cycle Waveform
8/cycle Waveform
1/10ms One cycle value *)
1/20ms One cycle value **)
1/200ms Average
1/1s Average
1/5s Average
1/10s Average
1/15s Average
1/30s Average
1/1min Average
Time s Recording length Set
PreTrig % Amount of recording data before the trig moment Set
MaxLen s Maximum time setting.
This value depends on sample rate, number and type of the se-
lected channels and the configured recording length.
Status Status of recording
- Not active
Run Waiting a triggering
Trig Recording
FULL Memory is full in saturated mode
ManTrig -, Trig Manual triggering Set
ReadyRec n/m n = Available recordings / m = maximum number of recordings
The value of 'm' depends on sample rate, number and type of

the selected channels and the configured recording length.
134 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.2 Disturbance recorder

AddCh Add one channel. Maximum simultaneous number of channels Set
is 12.
IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current
Io Measured residual current
U12, U23, U31 Line-to-line voltage
UL1, UL2, UL3 Phase-to-neutral voltage
f Frequency
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power
P.F. Power factor
CosFii cosφ
IoCalc Phasor sum Io = (IL1+IL2+IL3)/3
I1 Positive sequence current
I2 Negative sequence current
I2/I1 Relative current unbalance
I2/In Current unbalance [x IMOT]
IL Average (IL1 + IL2 + IL3) / 3
DI, DO Digital inputs, Digital outputs
TanFii tanφ
THDIL1, THDIL2, Total harmonic distortion of IL1, IL2 or IL3
THDIL3
Prms Active power rms value
Qrms Reactive power rms value
Srms Apparent power rms value
fy Frequency behind circuit breaker
fz Frequency behind 2nd circuit breaker
IL1RMS, IL2MRS, IL1, IL2, IL3 RMS for average sampling
IL3RMS
Starts Protection stage start signals
Trips Protection stage trip signals
Delete recorder Delete selected channel
channel
ClrCh -, Clear Remove all channels Set
(Ch) List of selected channels
Set = An editable parameter (password needed).
*) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 10 ms.
**) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.
V50/en M/A018 135

6.2.1 Running virtual comtrade files

Virtual comtrade files can be run with VAMP relays with the v.10.74
software or a later version. Relay behaviour can be analysed by
playing the recorder data over and over again in the relay memory.
Steps of opening the VAMPSET setting tool:
1. Go to “Disturbance record” and select Open… (A).
2. Select the comtrade file from you hard disc or equivalent.
VAMPSET is now ready to read the recording.
3. The virtual measurement has to be enabled (B) in order to send
record data to the relay (C).
4. Sending the file to the device’s memory takes a few seconds.
Initiate playback of the file by pressing the Go! button (D). The
“Change to control mode” button takes you back to the virtual
measurement.
NOTE: The sample rate of the comtrade file has to be 32/cycle (625 micro
seconds when 50 Hz is used). The channel names have to
correspond to the channel names in VAMP relays: IL1, IL2, IL3, I0,
U12, U23, UL1, UL2, UL3 and U0.
136 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.3 Cold load pick-up and inrush current detection
6.3 Cold load pick-up and inrush current

detection
Cold load pick-up
A situation is regarded as cold load when all the three phase currents
have been less than a given idle value and then at least one of the
currents exceeds a given pick-up level within 80 ms. In such case
the cold load detection signal is activated for a given time. This signal
is available for output matrix and blocking matrix. Using virtual outputs
of the output matrix setting group control is possible.
Application for cold load detection

Right after closing a circuit breaker a given amount of overload can
be allowed for a given limited time to take care of concurrent
thermostat controlled loads. Cold load pick-up function does this for
example by selecting a more coarse setting group for over-current
stage(s). It is also possible to use the cold load detection signal to
block any set of protection stages for a given time.
Inrush current detection

Inrush current detection is quite similar with the cold load detection
but it does also include a condition for second harmonic relative
content of the currents. When all phase currents have been less than
a given idle value and then at least one of them exceeds a given
pick-up level within 80 ms and the ratio 2nd harmonic ratio to
fundamental frequency, If2/If1, of at least one phase exceeds the
given setting, the inrush detection signal is activated. This signal is
available for output matrix and blocking matrix. Using virtual outputs
of the output matrix setting group control is possible.
By setting the 2nd harmonic pickup parameter for If2/If1 to zero, the
inrush signal will behave equally with the cold load pick-up signal.
Application for inrush current detection

The inrush current of transformers usually exceeds the pick-up setting
of sensitive overcurrent stages and contains a lot of even harmonics.
Right after closing a circuit breaker the pick-up and tripping of
sensitive overcurrent stages can be avoided by selecting a more
coarse setting group for the appropriate over-current stage with
inrush detect signal. It is also possible to use the detection signal to
block any set of protection stages for a given time.
NOTE: Inrush detection is based on FFT - calculation which recuires full

cycle of data for analyzing the harmonic content. Therefore when
using inrush blocking function the cold load pick up starting conditions
are used for activating the inrush blocking when the current rise is
noticed. If in the signal is found a significant ratio of second harmonic
V50/en M/A018 137
6.3 Cold load pick-up and inrush current detection 6 Supporting functions
component after 1st cycle the blocking is continued, otherwise 2nd

harmonic based blocking signal is released. Inrush blocking is
recommended to be used into time delayed overcurrent stages while
non blocked instant overcurrent stage is set to 20 % higher than
expected inrush current. By this scheme fast reaction time in short
circuit faults during the energization can be achieved while time
delayed stages are blocked by inrush function.
1 3 4
Pick-up
Idle
Cold
load
1. No activation because the current has not been under the set
IDLE current.
2. Current dropped under the IDLE current level but now it stays
between the IDLE current and the pick-up current for over 80ms.
3. No activation because the phase two lasted longer than 80ms.
4. Now we have a cold load activation which lasts as long as the
operation time was set or as long as the current stays above the
pick-up setting.
Figure 6.1: Functionality of cold load / inrush current feature.
Table 6.4: Parameters of the cold load & inrush detection function
ColdLd - Status of cold load detection:
Start Cold load situation is active
Trip Timeout
Inrush - Status of inrush detection:
Start Inrush is detected
Trip Timeout
Pickup A Primary scaled pick-up value
Idle A Primary scaled upper limit for idle current
MaxTime s Set
Idle xImode Current limit setting for idle situation Set
Pickup xImode Pick-up setting for minimum start current Set
80 ms Maximum transition time for start recognition
Pickupf2 % Pick-up value for relative amount of 2nd harmonic, If2/If1 Set
138 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.4 Current transformer supervision
6.4 Current transformer supervision

The relay supervise the external wiring between the relay terminals
and current transformers (CT) and the CT themselves. Furthermore,
this is a safety function as well, since an open secondary of a CT,
causes dangerous voltages.
The CT supervisor function measures phase currents. If one of the
three phase currents drops below IMIN< setting, while another phase
current is exceeding the IMAX> setting, the function will issue an alarm
after the operation delay has elapsed.
Table 6.5: Setting parameters of CT supervisor CTSV
Imax> 0.0 – 10.0 xIn 2.0 Upper setting for CT supervisor current
scaled to primary value, calculated by relay
Imin< 0.0 – 10.0 xIn 0.2 Lower setting for CT supervisor current
scaled to primary value, calculated by relay
t> 0.02 – 600.0 s 0.10 Operation delay
CT on On; Off - On CT supervisor on event
CT off On; Off - On CT supervisor off event
Table 6.6: Measured and recorded values of CT supervisor CTSV

Measured value ILmax A Maximum of phase currents
ILmin A Minimum of phase currents
Display Imax>, Imin< A Setting values as primary values
Recorded values Date - Date of CT supervision alarm
Time - Time of CT supervision alarm
Imax A Maximum phase current
Imin A Minimum phase current
6.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring

The relay has a condition monitoring function that supervises the
wearing of the circuit-breaker. The condition monitoring can give
alarm for the need of CB maintenance well before the CB condition
is critical.
The CB wear function measures the breaking current of each CB
pole separately and then estimates the wearing of the CB accordingly
the permissible cycle diagram. The breaking current is registered
when the trip relay supervised by the circuit breaker failure protection
(CBFP) is activated. (See Chapter 5.21 Circuit breaker failure
protection CBFP (50BF) for CBFP and the setting parameter
"CBrelay".)
V50/en M/A018 139

6.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring 6 Supporting functions
Breaker curve and its approximation

The permissible cycle diagram is usually available in the
documentation of the CB manufacturer (Figure 6.2). The diagram
specifies the permissible number of cycles for every level of the
breaking current. This diagram is parameterised to the condition
monitoring function with maximum eight [current, cycles] points. See
Table 6.7. If less than eight points needed, the unused points are
set to [IBIG, 1], where IBIG is more than the maximum breaking
capacity.
If the CB wearing characteristics or part of it is a straight line on a
log/log graph, the two end points are enough to define that part of
the characteristics. This is because the relay is using logarithmic
interpolation for any current values falling in between the given
current points 2 – 8.
The points 4 – 8 are not needed for the CB in Figure 6.2. Thus they
are set to 100 kA and one operation in the table to be discarded by
the algorithm.
100000
Number of permitted operations
10000
1000
100
50
20
10
100 200 500 1000 10000 100000
Breaked current (A) CBWEARcharacteristics
Figure 6.2: An example of a circuit breaker wearing characteristic graph.
Table 6.7: An example of circuit breaker wearing characteristics in a table

format. The values are taken from the figure above. The table is edited with
VAMPSET under menu "BREAKER CURVE".
Point Interrupted current Number of permitted
(kA) operations
1 0 (mechanical age) 10000
2 1.25 (rated current) 10000
3 31.0 (maximum breaking current) 80
4 100 1
5 100 1
6 100 1
7 100 1
8 100 1
140 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
Setting alarm points

There are two alarm points available having two setting parameters
each.
• Current
The first alarm can be set for example to nominal current of the
CB or any application typical current. The second alarm can be
set for example according a typical fault current.
• Operations left alarm limit
An alarm is activated when there are less operation left at the
given current level than this limit.
Any actual interrupted current will be logarithmically weighted for the
two given alarm current levels and the number of operations left at
the alarm points is decreased accordingly. When the "operations
left" i.e. the number of remaining operations, goes under the given
alarm limit, an alarm signal is issued to the output matrix. Also an
event is generated depending on the event enabling.
Clearing "operations left" counters

After the breaker curve table is filled and the alarm currents are
defined, the wearing function can be initialised by clearing the
decreasing operation counters with parameter "Clear" (Clear oper.
left cntrs). After clearing the relay will show the maximum allowed
operations for the defined alarm current levels.
Operation counters to monitor the wearing

The operations left can be read from the counters "Al1Ln" (Alarm 1)
and "Al2Ln" (Alarm2). There are three values for both alarms, one
for each phase. The smallest of three is supervised by the two alarm
functions.
Logarithmic interpolation
The permitted number of operations for currents in between the
defined points are logarithmically interpolated using equation
Equation 6.1:
a
C=
In
C = permitted operations
I = interrupted current
a = constant according Equation 6.2
n = constant according Equation 6.3
V50/en M/A018 141

Equation 6.2: Equation 6.3:
Ck a = C k I k2
ln
C k +1
n=
I
ln k +1
Ik
ln = natural logarithm function

Ck, Ck+1 = permitted operations. k = row 2 – 7 in Table 6.7.
Ik, Ik+1 = corresponding current. k = row 2 – 7 in Table 6.7.
Example of the logarithmic interpolation

Alarm 2 current is set to 6 kA. What is the maximum number of
operations according Table 6.7.
The current 6 kA lies between points 2 and 3 in the table. That gives
value for the index k. Using
k=2
Ck = 10000
Ck+1 = 80
Ik+1 = 31 kA
Ik = 1.25 kA
and the Equation 6.2 and Equation 6.3, the relay calculates
10000
ln
n= 80 = 1.5038
31000
ln
1250
a = 10000 ⋅ 12501.5038 = 454 ⋅ 10 6
Using Equation 6.1 the relay gets the number of permitted operations
for current 6 kA.
454 ⋅ 10 6
C= = 945
60001.5038
Thus the maximum number of current breaking at 6 kA is 945. This

can be verified with the original breaker curve in Figure 6.2. Indeed,
the figure shows that at 6 kA the operation count is between 900
and 1000. A useful alarm level for operation-left, could be in this
case for example 50 being about five per cent of the maximum.
142 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
Example of operation counter decrementing when the CB is

breaking a current
Alarm2 is set to 6 kA. CBFP is supervising trip relay T1 and trip signal
of an overcurrent stage detecting a two phase fault is connected to
this trip relay T1. The interrupted phase currents are 12.5 kA, 12.5
kA and 1.5 kA. How many are Alarm2 counters decremented?
Using Equation 6.1 and values n and a from the previous example,
the relay gets the number of permitted operation at 10 kA.
454 ⋅ 10 6
C10 kA = = 313
125001.5038
At alarm level 2, 6 kA, the corresponding number of operations is

calculated according
Equation 6.4:
C AlarmMax
∆=
C
945
∆ L1 = ∆ L 2 = =3
313
Thus Alarm2 counters for phases L1 and L2 are decremented by 3.

In phase L1 the currents is less than the alarm limit current 6 kA. For
such currents the decrement is one.
ΔL3 = 1
V50/en M/A018 143

Table 6.8: Local panel parameters of CBWEAR function

Parameter Value Unit Description Set
CBWEAR STATUS
- Operations left for
Al1L1 - Alarm 1, phase L1

Latest trip
Date Time stamp of the latest trip operation
time
IL1 A Broken current of phase L1

CBWEAR SET
Alarm1
Current 0.00 – 100.00 kA Alarm1 current level Set
Cycles 100000 – 1 Alarm1 limit for operations left Set
Alarm2
Current 0.00 – 100.00 kA Alarm2 current level Set
Cycles 100000 – 1 Alarm2 limit for operations left Set
CBWEAR SET2
Al1On On ; Off 'Alarm1 on' event enabling Set
Al1Off On ; Off 'Alarm1 off' event enabling Set
Al2On On ; Off 'Alarm2 on' event enabling Set
Al2Off On ; Off 'Alarm2 off' event enabling Set
Clear -; Clear Clearing of cycle counters Set
The breaker curve table is edited with VAMPSET.
144 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.6 Energy pulse outputs
6.6 Energy pulse outputs

The device can be configured to send a pulse whenever certain
amount of energy has been imported or exported. The principle is
presented in Figure 6.3. Each time the energy level reaches the pulse
size, an output relay is activated and the relay will be active as long
as defined by a pulse duration setting.
Figure 6.3: Principle of energy pulses
The relay has four energy pulse outputs. The output channels are:
• Active exported energy
• Reactive exported energy
• Active imported energy
• Reactive imported energy
Each channel can be connected to any combination of the output
relays using output matrix. The parameters for the energy pulses
can be found in the E menu under the submenus E-PULSE SIZES
and E-PULSE DURATION.
Table 6.9: Energy pulse output parameters
E-PULSE SIZES E+ 10 – 10 000 kWh Pulse size of active exported energy
Eq+ 10 – 10 000 kvarh Pulse size of reactive exported energy
E- 10 – 10 000 kWh Pulse size of active imported energy
Eq- 10 – 10 000 kvarh Pulse size of reactive imported energy
E-PULSE DURATION E+ 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of active exported energy
Eq+ 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of reactive exported energy
E- 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of active imported energy
Eq- 100 – 5000 ms Pulse length of reactive imported energy
V50/en M/A018 145

6.6 Energy pulse outputs 6 Supporting functions
Scaling examples
1. Average active exported power is 250 MW.
Peak active exported power is 400 MW.
Pulse size is 250 kWh.
The average pulse frequency will be 250/0.250 = 1000 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency will be 400/0.250 = 1600 pulses/h.
Set pulse length to 3600/1600 - 0.2 = 2.0 s or less.
The lifetime of the mechanical output relay will be
50x106/1000 h = 6 a.
This is not a practical scaling example unless an output relay
lifetime of about six years is accepted.
The average pulse frequency will be 100/0.400 = 250 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency will be 800/0.400 = 2000 pulses/h.
50x106/250 h = 23 a.
The average pulse frequency will be 25/0.060 = 416.7 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency will be 70/0.060 = 1166.7 pulses/h.
50x106/417 h = 14 a.
4. Average active exported power is 1900 kW.
The average pulse frequency will be 1900/10 = 190 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency will be 50000/10 = 5000 pulses/h.
50x106/190 h = 30 a.
146 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.6 Energy pulse outputs
+
VAMP relays PLC
Active exported Pulse counter input 1

energy pulses +E
Reactive exported Pulse counter input 2

energy pulses +Eq
Active imported Pulse counter input 3

energy pulses -E
Reactive imported Pulse counter input 4

energy pulses -Eq
e-pulseconf1
−
Figure 6.4: Application example of wiring the energy pulse outputs to a PLC having
common plus and using an external wetting voltage
VAMP relays +
PLC
Active exported
energy pulses +E
Pulse counter input 1
Reactive exported
energy pulses +Eq
Active imported
energy pulses -E
Reactive imported
energy pulses -Eq
−
e-pulseconf2
common minus and using an external wetting voltage
VAMP relays PLC
Active exported Pulse counter input 1

energy pulses +E
Reactive exported
energy pulses +Eq Pulse counter input 2
Active imported
energy pulses -E
Reactive imported
energy pulses -Eq Pulse counter input 4
e-pulseconf3
common minus and an internal wetting voltage.
V50/en M/A018 147

6.7 System clock and synchronization 6 Supporting functions
6.7 System clock and synchronization

The internal clock of the relay is used to time stamp events and
disturbance recordings.
The system clock should be externally synchronised to get
comparable event time stamps for all the relays in the system.
The synchronizing is based on the difference of the internal time and
the synchronising message or pulse. This deviation is filtered and
the internal time is corrected softly towards a zero deviation.
Time zone offsets

Time zone offset (or bias) can be provided to adjust the local time
for IED. The Offset can be set as a Positive (+) or Negative (-) value
within a range of -15.00 to +15.00 hours and a resolution of 0.01/h.
Basically quarter hour resolution is enough.
Daylight saving time (DST)

IED provides automatic daylight saving adjustments when configured.
A daylight savings time (summer time) adjustment can be configured
separately and in addition to a time zone offset.
Daylight time standards vary widely throughout the world. Traditional

daylight/summer time is configured as one (1) hour positive bias.
The new US/Canada DST standard, adopted in the spring of 2007
is: one (1) hour positive bias, starting at 2:00am on the second
Sunday in March, and ending at 2:00am on the first Sunday in
November. In the European Union, daylight change times are defined
relative to the UTC time of day instead of local time of day (as in
U.S.) European customers, please carefully find out local country
rules for DST.
148 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.7 System clock and synchronization
The daylight saving rules for Finland are the IED defaults (24-hour
clock):
- Daylight saving time start: Last Sunday of March at 03.00
- Daylight saving time end: Last Sunday of October at 04.00
To ensure proper hands-free year-around operation, automatic

daylight time adjustments must be configured using the “Enable
DST” and not with the time zone offset option.
Adapting auto adjust

During tens of hours of synchronizing the device will learn its average
deviation and starts to make small corrections by itself. The target
is that when the next synchronizing message is received, the
deviation is already near zero. Parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft" will
show the adapted correction time interval of this ±1 ms auto-adjust
function.
Time drift correction without external sync

If any external synchronizing source is not available and the system
clock has a known steady drift, it is possible to roughly correct the
clock deviation by editing the parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft". The
following equation can be used if the previous "AAIntv" value has
been zero.
604.8
AAIntv =
DriftInOneWeek
If the auto-adjust interval "AAIntv" has not been zero, but further
trimming is still needed, the following equation can be used to
calculate a new auto-adjust interval.
1
AAIntvNEW =
1 DriftInOneWeek
+
AAIntvPREVIOUS 604.8
The term DriftInOneWeek/604.8 may be replaced with the relative

drift multiplied by 1000, if some other period than one week has been
V50/en M/A018 149

used. For example if the drift has been 37 seconds in 14 days, the
relative drift is 37*1000/(14*24*3600) = 0.0306 ms/s.
Example 1
If there has been no external sync and the relay's clock is leading
sixty-one seconds a week and the parameter AAIntv has been zero,
the parameters are set as
AvDrft = Lead
604.8
AAIntv = = 9. 9 s
61
With these parameter values the system clock corrects itself with –1
ms every 9.9 seconds which equals –61.091 s/week.
Example 2
If there is no external sync and the relay's clock has been lagging
five seconds in nine days and the AAIntv has been 9.9 s, leading,
then the parameters are set as
1
AAIntv NEW = = 10.6
1 5000
−
9.9 9 ⋅ 24 ⋅ 3600
AvDrft = Lead
When the internal time is roughly correct – deviation is less than four
seconds – any synchronizing or auto-adjust will never turn the clock
backwards. Instead, in case the clock is leading, it is softly slowed
down to maintain causality.
150 V50/en M/A018

Table 6.10: System clock parameters

Date Current date Set
Time Current time Set
Style Date format Set
y-d-m Year-Month-Day
d.m.y Day.Month.Year
m/d/y Month/Day/Year
SyncDI - DI not used for synchronizing ***)
DI1, DI2 Minute pulse input

TZone -15.00 – +15.00 *) UTC time zone for SNTP synchronization. Set
Note: This is a decimal number. For example for state

of Nepal the time zone 5:45 is given as 5.75
DST No; Yes Daylight saving time for SNTP Set
SySrc Clock synchronisation source
Internal No sync recognized since 200s
DI Digital input
SNTP Protocol sync
SpaBus Protocol sync
ModBus Protocol sync
ModBus TCP Protocol sync
ProfibusDP Protocol sync
IEC101 Protocol sync
IEC103 Protocol sync
DNP3 Protocol sync
IRIG-B003 IRIG timecode B003 ****)
MsgCnt 0 – 65535, The number of received synchronisation messages or
pulses
0 – etc.
Dev ±32767 ms Latest time deviation between the system clock and
the received synchronization
SyOS ±10000.000 s Synchronisation correction for any constant deviation Set
in the synchronizing source
AAIntv ±1000 s Adapted auto adjust interval for 1 ms correction Set**)
AvDrft Lead; Lag Adapted average clock drift sign Set**)
FilDev ±125 ms Filtered synchronisation deviation
*) A range of -11 h – +12 h would cover the whole Earth but because the International Date Line does not follow the 180°
meridian, a more wide range is needed.
**) If external synchronization is used this parameter will be set automatically.
***) Set the DI delay to its minimum and the polarity such that the leading edge is the synchronizing edge.
****) Relay needs to be equipped with suitable hardware option module to receive IRIG-B clock synchronization signal.
(Chapter 14 Order information).
V50/en M/A018 151

Synchronisation with DI
Clock can be synchronized by reading minute pulses from digital
inputs, virtual inputs or virtual outputs. Sync source is selected with
SyncDI setting. When rising edge is detected from the selected input,
system clock is adjusted to the nearest minute. Length of digital input
pulse should be at least 50 ms. Delay of the selected digital input
should be set to zero.
Synchronisation correction
If the sync source has a known offset delay, it can be compensated
with SyOS setting. This is useful for compensating hardware delays
or transfer delays of communication protocols. A positive value will
compensate a lagging external sync and communication delays. A
negative value will compensate any leading offset of the external
synch source.
Sync source
When the device receives new sync message, the sync source
display is updated. If no new sync messages are received within
next 1.5 minutes, the device will change to internal sync mode.
Sync source: IRIG-B003

IRIG-B003 synchronization is supported with a dedicated
communication option with either a two-pole or two pins in a D9 rear
connector (See Chapter 14 Order information).
IRIG-B003 input clock signal voltage level is TLL. The input clock
signal originated in the GPS receiver must be taken to multiple relays
trough an IRIG-B distribution module. This module acts as a
centralized unit for a point-to-multiple point connection. Note: Daisy
chain connection of IRIG-B signal inputs in multiple relays must be
avoided.
152 V50/en M/A018

Antenna
GPS-Clock
IRIG-B signal
from clock
IRIG-B
Distribution z
Module
VAMP 321 Arc flash protection system
VAMP 50 VAMP 300 VAMP 200
VAMP relay series with IRIG-B synchronization capability
Recommended wiring: shieled cable of twisted-pair or coaxial type with a maximum length of 10 meters.
The recommended cable must be shielded and either of coaxial or

twisted pair type. Its length should not exceed a maximum of 10
meters.
Deviation
The time deviation means how much system clock time differs from
sync source time. Time deviation is calculated after receiving new
sync message. The filtered deviation means how much the system
clock was really adjusted. Filtering takes care of small deviation in
sync messages.
Auto-lag/lead
The device synchronizes to the sync source, meaning it starts
automatically leading or lagging to stay in perfect sync with the
master. The learning process takes few days.
V50/en M/A018 153

6.8 Running hour counter 6 Supporting functions
6.8 Running hour counter

This function calculates the total active time of the selected digital
input, virtual I/O or output matrix output signal. The resolution is ten
seconds.
Table 6.11: Running hour counter parameters
Runh 0 – 876000 h Total active time, hours (Set)
Note: The label text "Runh" can be edited with

VAMPSET.
Runs 0 – 3599 s Total active time, seconds (Set)
Starts 0 – 65535 Activation counter (Set)
Status Stop Current status of the selected digital signal
Run
DI - Select the supervised signal Set
- None
DI1 – DIn, Physical inputs
VI1 – VIn, Virtual inputs
LedA, Output matrix out signal LA
LedB, Output matrix out signal LB
LedC, Output matrix out signal LC
LedD, Output matrix out signal LD
LedE, Output matrix out signal LE
LedF, Output matrix out signal LF
LedG, Output matrix out signal LG
LedDR, Output matrix out signal DR
VO1 – VO6 Virtual outputs

Started at Date and time of the last activation
Stopped at Date and time of the last inactivation
(Set) = An informative value which can be edited as well.
154 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.9 Timers
6.9 Timers
The VAMP protection platform includes four settable timers that can
be used together with the user's programmable logic or to control
setting groups and other applications that require actions based on
calendar time. Each timer has its own settings. The selected on-time
and off-time is set and then the activation of the timer can be set to
be as daily or according the day of week (See the setting parameters
for details). The timer outputs are available for logic functions and
for the block and output matrix.
Figure 6.7: Timer output sequence in different modes.
The user can force any timer, which is in use, on or off. The forcing
is done by writing a new status value. No forcing flag is needed as
in forcing i.e. the output relays.
The forced time is valid until the next forcing or until the next reversing
timed act from the timer itself.
The status of each timer is stored in non-volatile memory when the
auxiliary power is switched off. At start up, the status of each timer
is recovered.
V50/en M/A018 155

6.9 Timers 6 Supporting functions
Table 6.12: Setting parameters of timers

Parameter Value Description
TimerN - Timer status
- Not in use
0 Output is inactive
1 Output is active
On hh:mm:ss Activation time of the timer
Off hh:mm:ss De-activation time of the timer
Mode For each four timers there are 12 different modes available:
- The timer is off and not running. The output is off i.e. 0 all the time.
Daily The timer switches on and off once every day.
Monday The timer switches on and off every Monday.
Tuesday The timer switches on and off every Tuesday.
Wednesday The timer switches on and off every Wednesday.
Thursday The timer switches on and off every Thursday.
Friday The timer switches on and off every Friday.
Saturday The timer switches on and off every Saturday.
Sunday The timer switches on and off every Sunday.
MTWTF The timer switches on and off every day except Saturdays and Sundays
MTWTFS The timer switches on and off every day except Sundays.
SatSun The timer switches on and off every Saturday and Sunday.
156 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.10 Combined overcurrent status
6.10 Combined overcurrent status

This function is collecting faults, fault types and registered fault
currents of all enabled overcurrent stages.
Combined over current status can be used as an indication of faults.
Combined o/c indicates the amplitude of the last occurred fault. Also
a separate indication of the fault type is informed during the start
and the trip. Active phases during the start and the trip are also
activated in the output matrix. After the fault is switched off the active
signals will release after the set delay “clearing delay“ has passed.
The combined o/c status referres to the following over current stages:
I>, I>>, I>>>, Iφ>, Iφ>>, Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>>.
Table 6.13: Line fault parameters
IFltLas xImode Current of the latest overcurrent fault (Set)
LINE ALARM
AlrL1 - Start (=alarm) status for each phase.
AlrL2 0 0 = No start since alarm ClrDly
AlrL3 1 1 = Start is on
OCs - Combined overcurrent start status.
0 AlrL1 = AlrL2 = AlrL3 = 0
1 AlrL1 = 1 or AlrL2 = 1 or AlrL3 = 1

LxAlarm - 'On' Event enabling for AlrL1 – 3 Set
On / Off Events are enabled / Events are disabled

LxAlarmOff - 'Off' Event enabling for AlrL1 – 3 Set

OCAlarm - 'On' Event enabling for combined o/c starts Set

OCAlarmOff - 'Off' Event enabling for combined o/c starts Set

IncFltEvnt - Disabling several start and trip events of the same fault Set
On Several events are enabled *)
Off Several events of an increasing fault is disabled **)

ClrDly 0 – 65535 s Duration for active alarm status AlrL1, Alr2, AlrL3 and OCs Set
LINE FAULT
FltL1 - Fault (=trip) status for each phase.
FltL2 0 0 = No fault since fault ClrDly
FltL3 1 1 = Fault is on
OCt - Combined overcurrent trip status.
0 FltL1 = FltL2 = FltL3 = 0
1 FltL1 = 1 or FltL2 = 1 or FltL3 = 1
V50/en M/A018 157

6.10 Combined overcurrent status 6 Supporting functions

LxTrip - 'On' Event enabling for FltL1 – 3 Set

LxTripOff - 'Off' Event enabling for FltL1 – 3 Set

OCTrip - 'On' Event enabling for combined o/c trips Set

OCTripOff - 'Off' Event enabling for combined o/c starts Set

IncFltEvnt - Disabling several events of the same fault Set
On Several events are enabled *)
Off Several events of an increasing fault is disabled **)

ClrDly 0 – 65535 s Duration for active alarm status FltL1, Flt2, FltL3 and OCt Set
*) Used with IEC 60870-105-103 communication protocol. The alarm screen will show the latest if it's the biggest registered
fault current, too. Not used with Spabus, because Spabus masters usually don't like to have unpaired On/Off events.
**) Used with SPA-bus protocol, because most SPA-bus masters do need an off-event for each corresponding on-event.
Figure 6.8: Combined o/c status.
The fault that can be seen in the Figure 6.8 was 3 times to nominal
and it started as an one phase fault L1-E. At the moment when one
of the protection stages tripped the fault was already increased in to
a two phase short circuit L1-L2. All signals those are stated as “1”
are also activated in the output matrix. After the fault disappears the
activated signals will release.
Combined over current status can be found from VAMPSET menu
“protection stage status 2”.
158 V50/en M/A018

6 Supporting functions 6.11 Self-supervision
6.11 Self-supervision
The functions of the microcontroller and the associated circuitry, as
well as the program execution are supervised by means of a separate
watchdog circuit. Besides supervising the relay, the watchdog circuit
attempts to restart the micro controller in an inoperable situation. If
the micro controller does not resart, the watchdog issues a
self-supervision signal indicating a permanent internal condition.
When the watchdog circuit detects a permanent fault, it always blocks
any control of other output relays (except for the self-supervision
output relay). In addition, the internal supply voltages are supervised.
Should the auxiliary supply of the IED disappear, an indication is
automatically given because the IED status inoperative (SF) output
relay functions on a working current principle. This means that the
SF relay is energized when the auxiliary supply is on and the arc
flash protection is healthy.
6.11.1 Diagnostics
The device runs self-diagnostic tests for hardware and software in
boot sequence and also performs runtime checking.
Permanent inoperative state
If permanent inoperative state has been detected, the device releases
SF relay contact and status LED is set on. Local panel will also
display a detected fault message. Permanet inoperative state is
entered when the device is not able to handle main functions.
Temporal inoperative state
When self-diagnostic function detects a temporal inoperative state,
Selfdiag matrix signal is set and an event (E56) is generated. In case
the inoperative state was only temporary, an off event is generated
(E57). Self diagnostic state can be reset via local HMI.
Diagnostic registers
There are four 16-bit diagnostic registers which are readable through
remote protocols. The following table shows the meaning of each
diagnostic register and their bits.
V50/en M/A018 159

6.11 Self-supervision 6 Supporting functions
Register Bit Code Description

SelfDiag1 0 (LSB) T1 Potential output relay problem
1 T2
2 T3
3 T4
4 A1
SelfDiag3 0 (LSB) DAC Potential mA-output problem

1 STACK Potential stack problem
2 MemChk Potential memory problem
3 BGTask Potential background task timeout
4 DI Potential input problem (Remove DI1, DI2)
5
6 Arc Potential arc card problem
7 SecPulse Potential hardware problem
8 RangeChk DB: Setting outside range
9 CPULoad Overload
10 +24V Potential internal voltage problem
11 -15V
12 ITemp Internal temperature too high
13 ADChk1 Potential A/D converter problem
14 ADChk2 Potential A/D converter problem
15 (MSB) E2prom Potential E2prom problem
SelfDiag4 1 ComBuff Potential BUS: buffer problem

2 OrderCode Potential order code problem
The code is displayed in self diagnostic events and on the diagnostic

menu on local panel and VAMPSET.
160 V50/en M/A018

7 Measurement functions
7 Measurement functions
All the direct measurements are based on fundamental frequency
values. The exceptions are frequency and instantaneous current for
arc protection. Most protection functions are also based on the
fundamental frequency values.
The device calculates the active (P), reactive (Q), apparent power
(S) and energy measures (E+, Eq+, E-, Eq-) from voltage and current
measurements when voltage measurement mode is set to 1LL
(line-to-line voltage) or 1LN (phase-to-neutral voltage).
The figure shows a current waveform and the corresponding
fundamental frequency component f1, second harmonic f2 and rms
value in a special case, when the current deviates significantly from
a pure sine wave.
Current (PU)
Load = 0%
100
rms f2/f1 (%)

5 f1 50
Relative 2nd harmoic f2/f1 (%)

f2
0 0
-5
IL2
-10
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30

Time (s)
Figure 7.1: Example of various current values of a transformer inrush current
7.1 Measurement accuracy

Table 7.1: Phase current inputs IL1, IL2, IL3
Measuring range 0.025 – 250 A
Inaccuracy: -
I ≤ 7.5 A ±0.5 % of value or ±15 mA
I > 7.5 A ±3 % of value

The specified frequency range is 45 Hz – 65 Hz.
Squelch limit:
Phase current inputs: 0.1% of INOM (tolerance +/- 0.05%)
Residual current: 0.2% of I0NOM (tolerance +/- 0.05%)
V50/en M/A018 161

7.2 RMS values 7 Measurement functions
Table 7.2: Voltage input U

Measuring range 0.5 – 190 V
Inaccuracy ±0.5 % or ±0.3 V
The usage of voltage inputs depends on the configuration parameter voltage measurement
mode. For example, U is the zero sequence voltage input U0 if the mode “U0” is selected.
Table 7.3: Residual current input I0N

Measuring range 0.003 – 10 x I0N
Inaccuracy: -
I ≤ 1.5 xIN ±0.3 % of value or ±0.2 % of I0N
I > 1.5 xIN ±3 % of value

The rated input I0N is 5A, 1 A or 0.2 A. It is specified in the order code of the relay.
Table 7.4: Frequency

Measuring range 16 Hz – 75 Hz
Inaccuracy ±10 mHz
The frequency is measured from current signals.
Frequency measurement squelch limit is 650mA.
Table 7.5: THD and harmonics

Inaccuracy I, U > 0.1 PU ±2 % units
Update rate Once a second
7.2 RMS values

RMS currents
The device calculates the RMS value of each phase current. The
minimum and the maximum of RMS values are recorded and stored
(see Chapter 7.5 Minimum and maximum values).
2 2 2
I RMS = I f 1 + I f 2 + ... + I f 15
RMS voltages
The device calculates the RMS value of each voltage input. The
minimum and the maximum of RMS values are recorded and stored
(see Chapter 7.5 Minimum and maximum values).
2 2 2
U RMS = U f 1 + U f 2 + ... + U f 15
162 V50/en M/A018

7 Measurement functions 7.3 Harmonics and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
7.3 Harmonics and Total Harmonic

Distortion (THD)
The device calculates the THDs as a percentage of the currents and
voltages values measured at the fundamental frequency. The device
calculates the harmonics from the 2nd to the 15th of phase currents
and voltages. (The 17th harmonic component will also be shown
partly in the value of the 15th harmonic component. This is due to
the nature of digital sampling.)
The harmonic distortion is calculated
15
2 h1 = Fundamental value
∑h i
THD = i =2 h2 – 15 = Harmonics
h1
Example
h1 = 100 A, h3 = 10 A, h7 = 3 A, h11 = 8 A
10 2 + 3 2 + 8 2
THD = = 13.2%
100
For reference the RMS value is
RMS = 100 2 + 10 2 + 3 2 + 8 2 = 100.9 A
Another way to calculate THD is to use the RMS value as reference

instead of the fundamental frequency value. In the example above
the result would then be 13.0 %.
V50/en M/A018 163

7.4 Demand values 7 Measurement functions
7.4 Demand values

The relay calculates average i.e. demand values of phase currents
IL1, IL2, IL3 and power values S, P and Q.
The demand time is configurable from 10 minutes to 30 minutes with
parameter "Demand time".
Table 7.6: Demand value parameters
Time 10 – 30 min Demand time (averaging time) Set
Fundamental frequency values
IL1da A Demand of phase current IL1
Pda kW Demand of active power P
PFda Demand of power factor PF
Qda Kvar Demand of reactive power Q
Sda kVA Demand of apparent power S
RMS values
IL1RMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IL1
7.5 Minimum and maximum values

Minimum and maximum values are registered with time stamps since
the latest manual clearing or since the device has been restarted.
The available registered min & max values are listed in the following
table.
Min & Max measurement Description
IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current (fundamental frequency value)
IL1RMS, IL2RMS, IL3RMS Phase current, rms value
I0 Residual current
U12 Line-to-line voltage
f Frequency
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power
IL1da, IL2da, IL3da Demand values of phase currents
IL1da, IL2da, IL3da (rms value) Demand values of phase currents, rms values
PFda Power factor demand value
The clearing parameter "ClrMax" is common for all these values.
164 V50/en M/A018

7 Measurement functions 7.6 Maximum values of the last 31 days and 12 months
Table 7.7: Parameters

Parameter Value Description Set
ClrMax - Reset all minimum and maximum values Set
Clear
7.6 Maximum values of the last 31 days and

12 months
Maximum and minimum values of the last 31 days and the last twelve
months are stored in the non-volatile memory of the relay.
Corresponding time stamps are stored for the last 31 days. The
registered values are listed in the following table.
Measurement Max Min Description 31 days 12
months
IL1, IL2, IL3 X Phase current (fundamental frequency value)
Io X Residual current
S X Apparent power X X
P X X Active power X X
Q X X Reactive power X X
The value can be a one cycle value or an average based on the

"Timebase" parameter.
Table 7.8: Parameters of the day and month registers
Parameter Value Description Set
Timebase Parameter to select the type of the registered values Set
20 ms Collect min & max of one cycle values *
200 ms Collect min & max of 200 ms average values
1s Collect min & max of 1 s average values
1 min Collect min & max of 1 minute average values
demand Collect min & max of demand values (Chapter 7.4 Demand values)
ResetDays Reset the 31 day registers Set
ResetMon Reset the 12 month registers Set
* This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.
V50/en M/A018 165

7.7 Voltage measurement modes 7 Measurement functions
7.7 Voltage measurement modes

Depending on the application and available voltage transformers,
the relay can be connected either to zero-sequence voltage, one
line-to-line voltage or one phase-to-ground voltage. The configuration
parameter "Voltage measurement mode" must be set according to
the type of connection used.
L1 L2 L3
U0
10
The device is connected to zero sequence voltage.
"U0" Directional ground fault protection is available.
11 Line voltage measurement, energy measurement
and over- and undervoltage protection are not
possible.
Figure 7.2: Broken delta connection “U0”.
L1 L2 L3
10 1LL
11
"1LL" The device is connected to one line-to-line voltage.
Single phase voltage measurement and over- and
undervoltage protection are available. Directional
ground fault protection is not possible.
Figure 7.3: Line-to-line voltage “1LL”.
L1 L2 L3
10 1LN
11 "1LN"
The device is connected to one phase-to-ground
voltage. Single phase voltage measurement is
available. In low impedance grounded networks
over- and undervoltage protection are available.
Directional ground fault protection is not possible.
Figure 7.4: Phase-to-neutral voltage “1LN”.
166 V50/en M/A018

7 Measurement functions 7.8 Power calculations
7.8 Power calculations

NOTE: These calculations is available when voltage measurement mode is
1LL (line-to-line voltage, see Figure 11.11) or 1LN (phase-to-neutral
voltage, see Figure 11.12).
The power calculations in the VAMP 52 are dependant on the voltage

measurement mode. The formulas used by the VAMP 52 for power
calculations are found in this chapter.
Line to line voltages measured (1LL mode)
As the device is measuring U12 only, the U23 voltage is calculated
by assuming that voltages are symmetrical.
o
a = 1∠120
2
U 23 = a U 12
S = U12 ⋅ I *L1 −U 23 ⋅ I *L 3
Measured line voltage L1-L2 phasor, fundamental frequency
= component.
Complex conjugate of the measured phase L1 current
= phasor.
Measured line voltage L2-L3 phasor, fundamental frequency

= component
Complex conjugate of the measured phase L3 current
= phasor.
P = real ( S )
Q = imag ( S )
P
cos ϕ =
S
V50/en M/A018 167

7.8 Power calculations 7 Measurement functions
Phase to neutral voltages measured (1LN mode)

Active power calculation for one phase:
PL1 = U L1 ⋅ I L1 ⋅ cos ϕ
Reactive power calculation for one phase:
QL1 = U L1 ⋅ I L1 ⋅ sin ϕ
UL1 = Measured L1 phase voltage
IL1 = Measured L1 current
φ= Angle between UL1 and IL1
Active, reactive and apparent power are calculated as follows:
P = 3PL1
Q = 3QL1
S = P2 + Q2
P
cos ϕ =
S
168 V50/en M/A018

7 Measurement functions 7.9 Direction of power and current
7.9 Direction of power and current

Figure 7.5 shows the concept of three phase current direction and
sign of cosφ and power factor PF. Figure 7.6 shows the same
concepts, but on a PQ-power plane.
+90°
II I
ind +cap
cos = cos = +
PF = + PF = I: Forward capacitive power current is leading
V REF 0°
II: Reverse inductive power current is leading
III I IV
III: Reverse capacitive power current is lagging
cap +ind
IV: Forward inductive power current is lagging
cos = cos = +
PF = PF = +
Figure 7.5: Quadrants of voltage/current phasor plane
Q
+90°
II cap +ind I
cos = cos = +
PF = PF = + I: Forward inductive power current is lagging
S
II: Reverse capacitive power current is lagging
P 0°
III IV III: Reverse inductive power current is leading
ind +cap
IV: Forward capacitive power current is leading
cos = cos = +
PF = + PF =
Figure 7.6: Quadrants of power plane
Table 7.9: Power quadrants

Power quadrant Current related Power direction cosφ Power factor
to voltage PF
+ inductive Lagging Forward + +
+ capacitive Leading Forward + -
- inductive Leading Reverse - +
- capacitive Lagging Reverse - -
V50/en M/A018 169

7.10 Symmetric components 7 Measurement functions
7.10 Symmetric components

In a three phase system, the voltage or current phasors may be
divided in symmetric components according C. L. Fortescue (1918).
The symmetric components are:
• Positive sequence 1
• Negative sequence 2
• Zero sequence 0
Symmetric components are calculated according the following
equations:
S 0  1 1 1  U 
 S  = 1 1 a a   V 
2
 1 3
 S 2  1 a 2 a  W 
S0 = zero sequence component

S1 = positive sequence component
S2 = negative sequence component
1 3
a = 1∠120° = − + j
2 2 , a phasor rotating constant
U = phasor of phase L1 (phase current)

V = phasor of phase L2
W = phasor of phase L3
170 V50/en M/A018

7 Measurement functions 7.11 Primary secondary and per unit scaling
7.11 Primary secondary and per unit scaling

Many measurement values are shown as primary values although
the relay is connected to secondary signals. Some measurement
values are shown as relative values - per unit or per cent. Almost all
pick-up setting values are using relative scaling.
The scaling is done using the given CT, VT in feeder mode and
furthermore motor name plate values in motor mode. The following
scaling equations are useful when doing secondary testing.
7.11.1 Current scaling

NOTE: The rated value of the device's current input, for example 5 A or 1A,
does not have any effect in the scaling equations, but it defines the
measurement range and the maximum allowed continuous current.
See Table 12.1 for details.
Primary and secondary scaling

Current scaling
CTPRI
secondary → primary I PRI = I SEC ⋅
CTSEC
CTSEC
primary → secondary I SEC = I PRI ⋅
CTPRI
For residual current to input I0 use the corresponding CTPRI and

CTSEC values. For ground fault stages using I0Calc signals use the
phase current CT values for CTPRI and CTSEC.
Examples:
1. Secondary to primary
CT = 500 / 5
Current to the relay's input is 4 A.
=> Primary current is IPRI = 4 x 500 / 5 = 400 A
2. Primary to secondary
CT = 500 / 5
The relay displays IPRI = 400 A
=> Injected current is ISEC = 400 x 5 / 500 = 4 A
V50/en M/A018 171

7.11 Primary secondary and per unit scaling 7 Measurement functions
Per unit [pu] scaling

For phase currents excluding ArcI> stage:
1 pu = 1 x IMODE = 100 %, where
IMODE is the rated current according to the mode. See Chapter 1.7
Abbreviations
For residual currents and ArcI> stage:
1 pu = 1 x CTSEC for secondary side and 1 pu = 1 x CTPRI for primary
side.
Phase current scaling excluding ArcI> stage Residual current (3I0) scaling and phase
current scaling for ArcI> stage
I SEC ⋅ CTPRI I SEC

secondary → per unit I PU = I PU =
CTSEC ⋅ I MODE CTSEC
I MODE
per unit → secondary I SEC = I PU ⋅ CTSEC ⋅ I SEC = I PU ⋅ CTSEC
CTPRI
Examples:
1. Secondary to per unit for ArcI>
CT = 750 / 5
Current injected to the relay's inputs is 7 A.
Per unit current is IPU = 7 / 5 = 1.4 pu = 140 %
2. Secondary to per unit for phase currents excluding ArcI>
CT = 750/5
IMODE = 525 A
Current injected to the relay's inputs is 7 A.
Per unit current is IPU = 7 x 750 / (5 x 525) = 2.00 pu = 2.00 x
IMODE = 200 %
3. Per unit to secondary for ArcI>
CT = 750 / 5
The device setting is 2 pu = 200 %.
Secondary current is ISEC = 2 x 5 = 10 A
4. Per unit to secondary for phase currents excluding ArcI>
CT = 750 / 5
IMODE = 525 A
The relay setting is 2 x IMODE = 2 pu = 200 %.
Secondary current is ISEC = 2 x 5 x 525 / 750 = 7 A
172 V50/en M/A018

5. Secondary to per unit for residual current

Input is I0.
CT0 = 50 / 1
Current injected to the relay's input is 30 mA.
Per unit current is IPU = 0.03 / 1 = 0.03 pu = 3 %
6. Per unit to secondary for residual current
Input is I0.
CT0 = 50 / 1
The relay setting is 0.03 pu = 3 %.
Secondary current is ISEC = 0.03 x 1 = 30 mA
7. Secondary to per unit for residual current
Input is I0Calc.
CT = 750 / 5
Currents injected to the relay's IL1 input is 0.5 A.
IL2 = IL3 = 0.
Per unit current is IPU = 0.5 / 5 = 0.1 pu = 10 %
8. Per unit to secondary for residual current
Input is I0Calc.
CT = 750 / 5
The relay setting is 0.1 pu = 10 %.
If IL2 = IL3 = 0, then secondary current to IL1 is
ISEC = 0.1 x 5 = 0.5 A
V50/en M/A018 173

7.11.2 Voltage scaling

Primary / secondary scaling of line-to-line voltages
Line-to-line voltage scaling
Voltage measurement mode = "1LL" Voltage measurement mode = "1LN"
VTPRI VTPRI
secondary → primary U PRI = U SEC ⋅ U PRI = 3 ⋅ U SEC ⋅
VTSEC VTSEC
VTSEC U PRI VTSEC

primary → secondary U SEC = U PRI ⋅ U SEC = ⋅
VTPRI 3 VTPRI
Examples:
1. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LL".
VT = 12000 / 110
Voltage connected to the relay's input is 100 V.
Primary voltage is UPRI = 100 x 12000 / 110 = 10909 V.
2. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LN".
VT = 12000 / 110
The voltage connected to the relay's input is 57.7 V.
Primary voltage is UPRI = x 58 x 12000 / 110 = 10902 V

3. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LL".
VT = 12000 / 110
The relay displays UPRI = 10910 V.
Secondary voltage is USEC = 10910 x 110 / 12000 = 100 V
4. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LN".
VT = 12000 / 110
The relay displays U12 = U23 = U31 = 10910 V.
Secondary voltage is USEC = 10910 / x 110 / 12000 = 57.7
V.
174 V50/en M/A018

Per unit [pu] scaling of line-to-line voltages
One per unit = 1 pu = 1xUN = 100 %, where UN = rated voltage of the VT.
Line-to-line voltage scaling
Voltage measurement mode = "1LL" Voltage measurement mode = "1LN"
U SEC U SEC
secondary → per unit U PU = U PU = 3 ⋅
VTSEC VTSEC
VTSEC
per unit → secondary U SEC = U PU ⋅ VTSEC U SEC = U PU ⋅
3
Examples:
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "1LL".
VT = 12000 / 110,
UN = VTPRI
Voltage connected to the relay's input is 110 V.
Per unit voltage is UPU = 110 / 110 = 1.00 pu = 1.00 x UN = 100
%
2. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "1LN".
VT = 12000 / 110,
Phase-to-neutral voltage connected to the relay's input is 63.5
V.
Per unit voltage is UPU = x 63.5 / 110 x 12000 / 11000 = 1.00

pu = 1.00 x UN = 100 %
3. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LL".
VT = 12000/110,
The relay displays 1.00 pu = 100 %.
Secondary voltage is USEC = 1.00 x 110 x 11000 / 12000 = 100.8
V
4. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LN".
VT = 12000 / 110,
The relay displays 1.00 pu = 100 %.
Phase-to-neutral voltage connected to the relay's input is
USEC = 1.00 x 110 / x 11000 / 12000 = 63.5 V
V50/en M/A018 175

Per unit [pu] scaling of zero sequence voltage

Zero-sequence voltage (U0) scaling
Voltage measurement mode = "U0"
U SEC
secondary ->per unit U PU =
U 0 SEC
per unit -> secondary U SEC = U PU ⋅ U 0 SEC
Examples:
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "U0".
U0SEC = 110 V (This is a configuration value corresponding to
U0 at full ground fault.)
Voltage connected to the device's input UC is 22 V.
Per unit voltage is UPU = 22 / 110 = 0.20 pu = 20 %
176 V50/en M/A018

7 Measurement functions 7.12 Analogue output (option)
7.12 Analogue output (option)

A device with the mA option has one configurable analogue output.
The resolution of the analogue output is 10 bits resulting current
steps less than 25 μA. The output current range is configurable
allowing e.g. the following ranges: 0 – 20 mA and 4 – 20 mA. More
exotic ranges like 0 – 5 mA or 10 – 2 mA can be configured freely
as long as the boundary values are within 0 – 20 mA.
Available couplings to the analog output:

• IL1, IL2, IL3
• IL
• Io, IoCalc
• U12 (only in VAMP52)
• UL1 (only in VAMP52)
7.12.1 mA scaling example

Example of configuration of scaling the transducer (mA) output.
Example of mA scaling for IL

Coupling = IL
Scaled minimum = 0 A
Scaled maximum = 300 mA
Analogue output minimum value = 0 mA
Analogue output maximum value = 20 mA
Analogue mAScaling_1
output (mA)
20
16
12
4
IL
300 (A)
Figure 7.7: The average of the three phase currents. At 0 A the transducer ouput
is 0 mA, at 300 A the output is 20 mA
V50/en M/A018 177

8 Control functions
8 Control functions
8.1 Output relays

The output relays are also called digital outputs. Any internal signal
can be connected to the output relays using output matrix. An output
relay can be configured as latched or non-latched. See Chapter 8.5
Output matrix for more details.
The difference between trip contacts and signal contacts is the DC
breaking capacity. See Table 12.4 and Table 12.5 for details. The
contacts are SPST normal open type (NO), except signal relay A1
which has change over contact (SPDT).
Table 8.1: Parameters of output relays
T1 – T4 0 Status of trip output relay F
1
A1 0 Status of alarm output relay F
1
SF 0 Status of the SF relay F
1 In VAMPSET, it is called as "Service

status output"
Force On Force flag for output relay forcing for test Set
purposes. This is a common flag for all
Off output relays and detection stage status,
too. Any forced relay(s) and this flag are
automatically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
REMOTE PULSES
A1, T3, T4 0.00 – 99.98 s Pulse length for direct output relay control Set
via communications protocols.
or
99.99 s = Infinite. Release by writing "0"
99.99 to the direct control parameter
NAMES for OUTPUT RELAYS (editable with VAMPSET only)
Description String of max. 32 characters Names for DO on VAMPSET screens. Set
Default is
"Trip relay n", n=1 – 4 or
"Signal relay n", n=1
F = Editable when force flag is on. Set = An editable parameter (password needed).
178 V50/en M/A018

8 Control functions 8.2 Digital inputs
8.2 Digital inputs

There are two (2) digital inputs available for control purposes.
The polarity – normal open (NO) / normal closed (NC) – and a delay
can be configured according the application. The signals are available
for the output matrix, block matrix, user's programmable logic etc.
Selection in order code Nominal voltage
1 24 V dc / 110 V ac
2 110 V dc / 220 V ac
3 220 V dc
The digital inputs need an external control voltage (ac or dc). The
voltage nominal activation level can be selected in Chapter 14 Order
information.
When 110 or 220 V ac voltage is used to activate the digital Inputs,
the AC mode should be selected as shown in Figure 8.1
Figure 8.1: AC mode selection in VAMPSET
These inputs are ideal for transferring the status information of

switching devices into the device.
Please note that it is possible to use two different control voltages
for the inputs.
Label and description texts can be edited with VAMPSET according
the application. Labels are the short parameter names used on the
local panel and descriptions are the longer names used by
VAMPSET.
V50/en M/A018 179

8.2 Digital inputs 8 Control functions
Table 8.2: Parameters of digital inputs

DI1, DI2 0; 1 Status of digital input
DI COUNTERS
DI1, DI2 0 – 65535 Cumulative active edge counter (Set)
DELAYS FOR DIGITAL INPUTS
DI1, DI2 0.00 – 60.00 s Definite delay for both on and off transitions Set
CONFIGURATION DI1 – DI6
Inverted no For normal open contacts (NO). Active edge is Set
0 -> 1
yes For normal closed contacts (NC). Active edge
is 1 -> 0
Indication display no No pop-up display Set
yes Indication display is activated at active DI edge
On event On Active edge event enabled Set
Off Active edge event disabled
Off event On Inactive edge event enabled Set
Off Inactive edge event disabled
NAMES for DIGITAL INPUTS (editable with VAMPSET only)
Label String of max. 10 characters Short name for DIs on the local display. Default Set
is "DIn", n = 1 – 2
Description String of max. 32 characters Long name for DIs. Default is "Digital input n", Set
n=1–2
180 V50/en M/A018

8 Control functions 8.3 Virtual inputs and outputs
8.3 Virtual inputs and outputs

There are virtual inputs and virtual outputs, which can in many places
be used like their hardware equivalents, execpt that they are only
located in the memory of the device. The virtual inputs acts like
normal digital inputs. The state of the virtual input can be changed
from display, communication bus and from VAMPSET. For example
setting groups can be changed using virtual inputs.
Table 8.3: Parameters of virtual inputs
VI1 – VI4 0; 1 Status of virtual input
Events On; Off Event enabling Set
NAMES for VIRTUAL INPUTS (editable with VAMPSET only)
Label String of max. 10 characters Short name for VIs on the local display Set
Default is "VIn", n = 1 – 4
Description String of max. 32 characters Long name for VIs. Default is "Virtual input n", Set
n=1–4
The six virtual outputs do act like output relays, but there are no
physical contacts. Virtual outputs are shown in the output matrix and
the block matrix. Virtual outputs can be used with the user's
programmable logic and to change the active setting group etc.
8.4 Function keys / F1 & F2

There are two independent function keys, F1 and F2, available in
the device front panel. As default, these keys are programmed to
toggle VI1 and VI2. It is possible to change F1 & F2 to toggle other
VIs or to act as object control.
8.5 Output matrix

By means of the output matrix, the output signals of the various
protection stages, digital inputs, logic outputs and other internal
signals can be connected to the output relays, virtual outputs, etc.
There are eight general purpose LED indicators – "A", "B", "C", "D",
"E", "F", "G" and "H" – available for customer-specific indications on
the front panel.
Furthermore there are two LED indicators specified for keys F1 and
F2. In addition, the triggering of the disturbance recorder (DR) and
virtual outputs are configurable in the output matrix.
See an example in Figure 8.2.
V50/en M/A018 181

8.5 Output matrix 8 Control functions
Figure 8.2: Output matrix
An output relay or indicator LED can be configured as latched or

non-latched. A non-latched relay follows the controlling signal. A
latched relay remains activated although the controlling signal
releases.
“Auto LED release” function is designed to indicate only the latest
event. When Auto LED release is enabled “old” latched LED’s will
release latch when new event occurs. This way only the latest event
LED’s are active. “ Auto LED release enable time” sets the time delay
after the event deactivation latched LED is interpret as “old”. See an
example in Figure 8.3.
Figure 8.3: Local panel configuration menu
Figure 8.4: Release output matrix latches
There is a common "release all latches" signal to release all the

latched relays. This release signal resets all the latched output relays
and indicators with CPU and FPGA control. The reset signal can be
given via a digital input, via HMI or through communication. The
selection of the input is done with the VAMPSET software under the
menu "Release output matrix latches". See an example in Figure 8.4.
NOTE: "Release all latches" signal clears and resets FPGA controlled
latches.
182 V50/en M/A018

8 Control functions 8.6 Blocking matrix
8.6 Blocking matrix

By means of a blocking matrix, the operation of any protection stage
can be blocked. The blocking signal can originate from the digital
inputs DI1 to DI2, or it can be a start or trip signal from a protection
stage or an output signal from the user's programmable logic. In the
block matrix Figure 8.5 an active blocking is indicated with a black
dot (●) in the crossing point of a blocking signal and the signal to be
blocked.
Figure 8.5: Blocking matrix and output matrix
V50/en M/A018 183

8.7 Controllable objects 8 Control functions
8.7 Controllable objects

The device allows controlling of six objects(1, that is, circuit-breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches. Controlling can be done by
"select-execute" or "direct control" principle.
(1
Firmware supports control of six objects even tough the hardware
may not have sufficient amount of DI / DO.
The object block matrix and logic functions can be used to configure
interlocking for a safe controlling before the output pulse is issued.
The objects 1 – 6 are controllable while the objects 7 – 8 are only
able to show the status.
Controlling is possible by the following ways:
• through the local HMI
• through a remote communication
• through a digital input
• through the function key
The connection of an object to specific output relays is done via an
output matrix (object 1 – 6 open output, object 1 – 6 close output).
There is also an output signal “Object failed”, which is activated if
the control of an object is not completed.
Object states
Each object has the following states:
Setting Value Description
Object state Undefined (00) Actual state of the object
Open
Close
Undefined (11)
Basic settings for controllable objects

Each controllable object has the following settings:
DI for ‘obj open’ None, any digital input, virtual input or virtual Open information
output
DI for ‘obj close’ Close information
DI for ‘obj ready’ Ready information
Max ctrl pulse length 0.02 – 600 s Pulse length for open and close commands
Completion timeout 0.02 – 600 s Timeout of ready indication
Object control Open/Close Direct object control
If changing states takes longer than the time defined by “Max ctrl
pulse length” setting, object is inoperative and “Object failure” matrix
signal is set. Also undefined-event is generated. “Completion timeout”
184 V50/en M/A018

8 Control functions 8.7 Controllable objects
is only used for the ready indication. If “DI for ‘obj ready’” is not set,
completion timeout has no meaning.
Each controllable object has 2 control signals in matrix:
Output signal Description
Object x Open Open control signal for the object
Object x Close Close control signal for the object
These signals send control pulse when an object is controlled by

digital input, remote bus, auto-reclose etc.
Settings for read-only objects
DI for ‘obj open’ None, any digital input, virtual input or virtual Open information
output
DI for ‘obj close’ Close information
Object timeout 0.02 – 600 s Timeout for state changes
If changing states takes longer than the time defined by “Object

timeout” setting, and “Object failure” matrix signal is set. Also
undefined-event is generated.
8.7.1 Controlling with DI

Objects can be controlled with digital input, virtual input or virtual
output. There are four settings for each controllable object:
Setting Active
DI for remote open / close control In remote state
DI for local open / close control In local state
If the device is in local control state, the remote control inputs are
ignored and vice versa. Object is controlled when a rising edge is
detected from the selected input. Length of digital input pulse should
be at least 60 ms.
V50/en M/A018 185

8.7 Controllable objects 8 Control functions
8.7.2 Local/Remote selection

In Local mode, the output relays can be controlled via a local HMI,
but they cannot be controlled via a remote serial communication
interface.
In Remote mode, the output relays cannot be controlled via a local
HMI, but they can be controlled via a remote serial communication
interface.
The selection of the Local/Remote mode is done by using a local
HMI, or via one selectable digital input. The digital input is normally
used to change a whole station to a local or remote mode. The
selection of the L/R digital input is done in the “Objects” menu of the
VAMPSET software.
NOTE: A password is not required for a remote control operation.
8.7.3 Controlling with F1 & F2

Objects can be controlled with F1 & F2.
As default these keys are programmed to toggle F1 and F2. It is
possible to configure F1 & F2 to toggle VI1 – VI4 or act as object
control. Selection of the F1 and F2 function is made with the
VAMPSET software under the FUNCTION BUTTONS menu.
Table 8.4: Parameters of F1, F2
F1 – F2
0 Function key toggles Virtual input 1 – 4 and Function button
VI1 – VI4 1 – 2 between on (1) and off (0)
Set
ObjCtrl When Object conrol in chosen F1 and F2 can be linked in
1 OBJECTS to desired objects close/open command.
PrgFncs
Selected object and control is shown in VAMPSET software under

the menu ”FUNCTION BUTTONS”. If no object with local control is
selected ’-’ is shown. If multiple local controls are selected for one
key ’?’ is shown.
186 V50/en M/A018

8 Control functions 8.8 Auto-reclose function (79)
8.8 Auto-reclose function (79)

The VAMP protection relays include a sophisticated Auto-reclosing
(AR) function. The AR function is normally used in feeder protection
relays that are protecting an overhead line. Most of the overhead
line faults are temporary in nature. Even 85% can be cleared by
using the AR function.
General
The basic idea is that normal protection functions will detect the fault.
Then the protection function will trigger the AR function. After tripping
the circuit-breaker (CB), the AR function can reclose the CB.
Normally, the first reclose (or shot) is so short in time that consumers
cannot notice anything. However, the fault is cleared and the feeder
will continue in normal service.
Terminology
Even though the basic principle of AR is very simple; there are a lot
of different timers and parameters that have to be set.
In VAMP relays, there are five shots. A shot consists of open time
(so called “dead” time) and close time (so called “burning” time or
discrimination time). A high-speed shot means that the dead time is
less than 1 s. The time-delayed shot means longer dead times up
to 2-3 minutes.
There are four AR lines. A line means an initialization signal for AR.
Normally, start or trip signals of protection functions are used to
initiate an AR-sequence. Each AR line has a priority. AR1 has the
highest and AR4 has the lowest one. This means that if two lines
are initiated at the same time, AR will follow only the highest priority
line. A very typical configuration of the lines is that the instantaneous
overcurrent stage will initiate the AR1 line, time-delayed overcurrent
stage the AR2 line and earth-fault protection will use lines AR3 and
AR4.
For more information about auto-reclosing, please refer to our
application note “Auto-reclosing function in VAMP protection relays”.
The auto-reclose (AR) matrix in the following Figure 8.6 describes
the start and trip signals forwarded to the auto-reclose function.
V50/en M/A018 187

8.8 Auto-reclose function (79) 8 Control functions
Open CB
Close CB
AR-matrix Ready Start delay Dead time Discrimination Reclaim time
(Wait for time
.
.
I>>s
I>t
I>s
AR-request)
Move back to shot 1.

Reclaim time succeeded.
Critical 0...300 s 0...300 s
Shot 1 AR1 In use 0...300 s 0...300 s 0...300 s 0...300 s
AR2 In use
Not in use 0...300 s 0...300 s

Shot 2 In use
continue on next shot

reclaim time,
activated during
If new AR request is
make final trip
discrimination time,
activated during
If critical signal is
Shot 3...5
Figure 8.6: Auto-reclose matrix
The AR matrix above defines which signals (the start and trip signals
from protection stages or digital input) are forwarded to the
auto-reclose function. In the AR function, the AR signals can be
configured to initiate the reclose sequence. Each shot from 1 to 5
has its own enabled/disabled flag. If more than one AR signal
activates at the same time, AR1 has highest priority and AR2 the
lowest. Each AR signal has an independent start delay for the shot
1. If a higher priority AR signal activates during the start delay, the
start delay setting will be changed to that of the highest priority AR
signal.
After the start delay the circuit-breaker (CB) will be opened if it is
closed. When the CB opens, a dead time timer is started. Each shot
from 1 to 5 has its own dead time setting.
After the dead time the CB will be closed and a discrimination time
timer is started. Each shot from 1 to 5 has its own discrimination time
setting. If a critical signal is activated during the discrimination time,
the AR function makes a final trip. The CB will then open and the
AR sequence is locked. Closing the CB manually clears the “locked”
state.
After the discrimination time has elapsed, the reclaim time timer
starts. If any AR signal is activated during the reclaim time or the
discrimination time, the AR function moves to the next shot. The
reclaim time setting is common for every shot.
If the reclaim time runs out, the auto-reclose sequence is successfully
executed and the AR function moves to ready -state and waits for a
new AR request in shot 1.
188 V50/en M/A018

A trip signal from the protection stage can be used as a backup.

Configure the start signal of the protection stage to initiate the AR
function. If something fails in the AR function, the trip signal of the
protection stage will open the CB. The delay setting for the protection
stage should be longer than the AR start delay and discrimination
time.
If a critical signal is used to interrupt an AR sequence, the
discrimination time setting should be long enough for the critical
stage, usually at least 100 ms.
Manual closing
When CB is closed manually with the local panel, remote bus, digital
inputs etc, the reclaim-state is activated. Within the reclaim time all
AR requests are ignored. It is up to protection stages to take care of
tripping. Trip signals of protection stages must be connected to a
trip relay in the output matrix.
Manual opening
Manual CB open command during AR sequence will stop the
sequence and leaves the CB open.
Reclaim time setting

• Use shot specific reclaim time: No
Reclaim time setting defines reclaim time between different shots
during sequence and also reclaim time after manual closing.
• Use shot specific reclaim time: Yes
Reclaim time setting defines reclaim time only for manual control.
Reclaim time between different shots is defined by shot specific
reclaim time settings.
Support for 2 circuit breakers

AR function can be configured to handle 2 controllable objects. Object
1 – 6 can be configured to CB1 and any other controllable object
can be used as CB2. The object selection for CB2 is made with
Breaker 2 object setting. Switching between the two objects is done
with a digital input, virtual input, virtual output or by choosing Auto
CB selection. AR controls CB2 when the input defined by Input for
selecting CB2 setting is active (except when using auto CB selection
when operated CB 1 or 2 is that which was last in close state). Control
is changed to another object only if the current object is not close.
V50/en M/A018 189

Blocking of AR shots
Each AR shot can be blocked with a digital input, virtual input or
virtual output. Blocking input is selected with Block setting. When
selected input is active the shot is blocked. A blocked shot is treated
like it doesn’t exist and AR sequence will jump over it. If the last shot
in use is blocked, any AR request during reclaiming of the previous
shot will cause final tripping.
Starting AR sequence
Each AR request has own separate starting delay counter. The one
which starting delay has elapsed first will be selected. If more than
one delay elapses at the same time, an AR request of the highest
priority is selected. AR1 has the highest priority and AR4 has the
lowest priority. First shot is selected according to the AR request.
Next AR opens the CB and starts counting dead time.
Starting sequence at shot 2 – 5 & skipping of AR shots

Each AR request line can be enabled to any combination of the 5
shots. For example making a sequence of Shot 2 and Shot 4 for
AR request 1 is done by enabling AR1 only for those two shots.
NOTE: If AR sequence is started at shot 2 – 5 the starting delay is taken

from the discrimination time setting of the previous shot. For example
if Shot 3 is the first shot for AR2, the starting delay for this sequence
is defined by Discrimination time of Shot 2 for AR2.
Critical AR request
Critical AR request stops the AR sequence and cause final tripping.
Critical request is ignored when AR sequence is not running and
also when AR is reclaiming.
Critical request is accepted during dead time and discrimination time.
Shot active matrix signals

When starting delay has elapsed, active signal of the first shot is set.
If successful reclosing is executed at the end of the shot, the active
signal will be reset after reclaim time. If reclosing was not successful
or new fault appears during reclaim time, the active of the current
shot is reset and active signal of the next shot is set (if there are any
shots left before final trip).
AR running matrix signal

This signal indicates dead time. The signal is set after controlling CB
open. When dead time ends, the signal is reset and CB is controlled
close.
190 V50/en M/A018

Final trip matrix signals

There are 5 final trip signals in the matrix, one for each AR request
(1 to 4 and 1 critical). When final trip is generated, one of these
signals is set according to the AR request which caused the final
tripping. The final trip signal will stay active for 0.5 seconds and then
resets automatically.
DI to block AR setting
This setting is useful with an external synchro-check device. This
setting only affects re-closing the CB. Re-closing can be blocked
with a digital input, virtual input or virtual output. When the blocking
input is active, CB won’t be closed until the blocking input becomes
inactive again. When blocking becomes inactive the CB will be
controlled close immediately.
Table 8.5: Setting parameters of AR function
ARena ARon; ARoff - ARon Enabling/disabling the autoreclose
ExtSync None, - - The digital input for blocking CB close. This can be
used for Synchrocheck.
any digital input, virtual
input or virtual output
AR_DI None, - - The digital input for toggling the ARena parameter
any digital input, virtual

input or virtual output
AR2grp ARon; ARoff - ARon Enabling/disabling the autoreclose for group 2
ReclT 0.02 – 300.00 s 10.00 Reclaim time setting. This is common for all the
shots.
CB Obj1 – Obj6 Obj1 Breaker object in use
CB1 Obj1 – Obj6 Obj1 Breaker 1 object
CB2 Obj1 – Obj6 - Breaker 2 object
AutoCBSel On; Off off Enabling/disabling the auto CB selection
CB2Sel None, any digital input, - The digital input for selecting the CB2.
virtual input or virtual
output
ARreq On; Off - Off AR request event
ShotS On; Off - Off AR shot start event
ARlock On; Off - Off AR locked event
CritAr On; Off - Off AR critical signal event
ARrun On; Off - Off AR running event
FinTrp On; Off - Off AR final trip event
ReqEnd On; Off - Off AR end of request event
ShtEnd On; Off - Off AR end of shot event
CriEnd On; Off - Off AR end of critical signal event
ARUnl On; Off - Off AR release event
ARStop On; Off - Off AR stopped event
FTrEnd On; Off - Off AR final trip ready event
V50/en M/A018 191


ARon On; Off - Off AR enabled event
ARoff On; Off - Off AR disabled event
CRITri On; Off - On AR critical final trip on event
AR1Tri On; Off - On AR AR1 final trip on event
AR2Tri On; Off - On AR AR2 final trip on event
Shot settings
DeadT 0.02 – 300.00 s 5.00 The dead time setting for this shot. This is a com-
mon setting for all the AR lines in this shot
AR1 On; Off - Off Indicates if this AR signal starts this shot
Start1 0.02 – 300.00 s 0.02 AR1 Start delay setting for this shot
Discr1 0.02 – 300.00 s 0.02 AR1 Discrimination time setting for this shot
192 V50/en M/A018

Table 8.6: Measured and recorded values of AR function

Measured or recor- Obj1 UNDEFINED; - Object 1 state
ded values
OPEN;
CLOSE;
OPEN_REQUEST;
CLOSE_REQUEST;
READY;
NOT_READY;
INFO_NOT_AVAILABLE;
FAIL
Status INIT; - AR-function state
RECLAIM_TIME;
READY;
WAIT_CB_OPEN;
WAIT_CB_CLOSE;
DISCRIMINATION_TIME;
LOCKED;
FINAL_TRIP;
CB_FAIL;
INHIBIT
Shot# 1–5 - The currently running
shot
ReclT RECLAIMTIME; - The currently running
time (or last executed)
STARTTIME;
DEADTIME;
DISCRIMINATIONTIME
SCntr - Total start counter
Fail - The counter for failed
AR shots
Shot1* - Shot1 start counter
* There are 5 counters available for each one of the two AR signals.
V50/en M/A018 193

I> setting
Current
Open command
CB
Close command
CB
CBclose
state
CBopen
state
Figure 8.7: Example sequence of two shots. After shot 2 the fault is cleared.
1. Current exceeds the I> setting; the start delay from shot 1 starts.
2. After the start delay, an OpenCB relay output closes.
3. A CB opens. The dead time from shot 1 starts, and the OpenCB
relay output opens.
4. The dead time from shot 1 runs out; a CloseCB output relay
closes.
5. The CB closes. The CloseCB output relay opens, and the
discrimination time from shot 1 starts. The current is still over the
I> setting.
6. The discrimination time from the shot 1 runs out; the OpenCB
relay output closes.
7. The CB opens. The dead time from shot 2 starts, and the
OpenCB relay output opens.
8. The dead time from shot 2 runs out; the CloseCB output relay
closes.
9. The CB closes. The CloseCB output relay opens, and the
discrimination time from shot 2 starts. The current is now under
I> setting.
10. Reclaim time starts. After the reclaim time the AR sequence is
successfully executed. The AR function moves to wait for a new
AR request in shot 1.
194 V50/en M/A018

8 Control functions 8.9 Logic functions
8.9 Logic functions

The device supports customer-defined programmable logic for
boolean signals. The logic is designed by using the VAMPSET setting
tool and downloaded to the device. Functions available are:
• AND • XOR • COUNTERs
• OR • NOT • RS & D flip-flops
Logic is made with VAMPSET setting tool. Consumed memory is

dynamically shown on the configuration view in percentage. The first
value indicates amount of used inputs, second amount of gates and
third values shows amount of outputs consumed.
Figure 8.8: Logic can be found and modified in “logic” menu in VAMPSET setting tool
Percentages show used memory amount.

Inputs/Logical functions/Outputs- used. None of these is not allowed
to exceed 100%. See guide below to learn basics of logic creation:
1 2
3
4
Figure 8.9: How to create logical nodes.
1. Press empty area to add a logic gate, confirm new function by

pressing “Yes”.
2. Logic function is always "AND" -gate as a default.
3. While logic increases the capacity is increasing as well.
4. To joint logic functions, go on top of the output line of gate and
hold down mouse left -> make the connection to other logic
functions input.
V50/en M/A018 195

8.9 Logic functions 8 Control functions
1 3
2 5
Figure 8.10: Logic creation
1. Left click on top of any logic function to activate the “Select

operation” view.
2. Edit properties button opens the “Function properties” window.
3. Generally it is possible to choose the type of logic function
between and/or/counter/swing -gate.
4. When counter is selected, count setting may be set here.
5. Separate delay setting for logic activation and dis-activation.
6. Possible to invert the output of logic. Inverted logic output is
marked with circle.
1
2 4
3
Figure 8.11: Logic creation
1. Select input signals can be done by pressing the following button

or by clicking mouse left on top of the logic input line.
2. Select outputs can be done by pressing the following button or
by clicking mouse left on top of the logic output line.
3. This deletes the logic function.
4. When logic is created and settings are written to the IED the unit
requires a restart. After restarting the logic output is automatically
assigned in output matrix as well.
NOTE: Whenever writing new logic to the IED the unit has to be restarted.
196 V50/en M/A018

9 Communication and protocols
9 Communication and protocols
9.1 Communication ports

The relay has one communication port. See Figure 9.1.
There is also one optional communication module slot in the rear
panel.
CommunicationPorts50
COMMUNICATION PORTS
LOCAL EXTENSION REMOTE ETHERNET

PORT PORT PORT PORT
Communication
option
Front panel in use
Ethernet
RS-232
D-
USB
2 1
FRONT PANEL
3 4
D+
GND
Figure 9.1: Communication ports and connectors. The DSR signal from the front
panel port selects the active connector for the RS232 local port.
V50/en M/A018 197

9.1 Communication ports 9 Communication and protocols
9.1.1 Local port (Front panel)

The relay has a USB-connector in the front panel
Protocol for the USB port
The front panel USB port is always using the command line protocol
for VAMPSET regardless of the selected protocol for the rear panel
local port.
If other than “None” protocol is selected for the rear panel local port,
the front panel connector, when activated, is still using the plain
command line interface with the original speed, parity etc. For
example if the rear panel local port is used for remote VAMPSET
communication using SPA-bus default 9600/7E1, it is possible to
temporarily connect a PC with VAMPSET to the front panel
connector.
Connecting a cable between the PC and the relay will create a virtual
com-port. The default settings for the relay are 38400/8N1. The
communication parameter display on the local display will show the
active parameter values for the local port.
Physical interface
The physical interface of this port is USB.
198 V50/en M/A018

9 Communication and protocols 9.1 Communication ports

Protocol Protocol selection for the rear panel local port. Set
None Command line interface for VAMPSET
SpaBus SPA-bus (slave)
ProfibusDP Profibus DB (slave)
ModbusSla Modbus RTU slave
ModbusTCPs Modbus TCP slave
IEC-103 IEC-60870-5-103 (slave)
ExternalIO Modbus RTU master for external I/O-modules
DNP3 DNP 3.0
Msg# 0– 232-1 Message counter since the device has restarted Clr
or since last clearing
Errors 0 – 216-1 Protocol errors since the device has restarted Clr
Tout 0 – 216-1 Timeout errors since the device has restarted Clr
- Display of actual communication parameters. 1)
speed/DPS Speed = bit/s
Default = 38400/8N1 for D = number of data bits

VAMPSET
P = parity: none, even, odd
S = number of stop bits

VAMPSET communication (Direct or SPA-bus embedded command line interface)
Tx bytes/size Unsent bytes in transmitter buffer/size of the
buffer
Msg# 0 – 232-1 Message counter since the device has restarted Clr
Errors 0 – 216-1 Errors since the device has restarted or since Clr
last clearing
Tout 0 – 216-1 Timeout errors since the device has restarted Clr
Set = An editable parameter (password needed). Clr = Clearing to zero is possible.
1) The communication parameters are set in the protocol specific menus. For the local port command line interface the
parameters are set in configuration menu.
V50/en M/A018 199

9.1.2 Remote port

Protocol Protocol selection for remote port Set
None -
SPA-bus SPA-bus slave
ProfibusDP Profibus DB slave
IEC-103 IEC-60870-5-103 slave
DNP3 DNP 3.0
Msg# 0 – 232-1 Message counter since the device has restarted or Clr
since last clearing
Errors 0 – 216-1 Protocol errors since the device has restarted or since Clr
last clearing
Tout 0 – 216-1 Timeout errors since the device has restarted or since Clr
last clearing
- Display of current communication parameters. 1)
D = number of data bits

Debug - Echo to local port Set
No No echo
Binary For binary protocols
ASCII For SPA-bus protocol
200 V50/en M/A018

9.1.3 Extension port

Protocol Protocol selection for extension port Set
SPA-bus SPA-bus slave
ProfibusDP Profibus DB slave
IEC-103 IEC-60870-5-103 slave
DNP3 DNP 3.0
Msg# 0 – 232-1 Message counter since the device has restarted or Clr
since last clearing
Errors 0 – 216-1 Protocol errors since the device has restarted or since Clr
last clearing
Tout 0 – 216-1 Timeout errors since the device has restarted or since Clr
last clearing
- Display of current communication parameters. 1)
Default = 38400/8N1 D = number of data bits

for VAMPSET
9.1.4 Ethernet port

TCP port 1st INST and TCP port 2nd INST are ports for ethernet
communication protocols. Ethernet communication protocols can be
selected to these ports when such hardware option is installed. The
parameters for these ports are set via local HMI or with VAMPSET
in menus TCP port 1st INST and TCP port 2nd INST. Two different
protocols can be used simultaneously on one physical interface (both
protocols use the same IP address and MAC address but different
IP port).
Protocol configuration menu contains address and other related
information for the ethernet port. TCP port 1st and 2nd instance
include selection for the protocol, IP port settings and
message/error/timeout counters. More information about the protocol
configuration menu on table below.
V50/en M/A018 201

Table 9.4: Main configuration parameters (local display), inbuilt Ethernet

port
Protocol Protocol selection for the extension port Set
IEC-101 IEC-101
IEC 61850 IEC-61850 protocol
EtherNet/IP Ethernet/IP protocol
DNP3 DNP/TCP
Port nnn Ip port for protocol, default 102 Set
IpAddr n.n.n.n Internet protocol address (set with Set
VAMPSET)
NetMsk n.n.n.n Net mask (set with VAMPSET) Set
Gatew default = 0.0.0.0 Gateway IP address (set with VAMPSET) Set
NTPSvr n.n.n.n Network time protocol server (set with Set
VAMPSET)
0.0.0.0 = no SNTP
KeepAlive nn TCP keepalive interval Set 1)
FTP server on/off Enable FTP server Set
FTP speed 4 Kb/s (default) Maximum transmission speed for FTP Set
FTP password ? (user) FTP password Set
config (configurator)
MAC address 001ADnnnnnnn MAC address
VS Port nn IP port for Vampset Set
23 (default)
Msg# nnn Message counter
Errors nnn Error counter
Tout nnn Timeout counter
EthSffEn on/off Sniffer port enable Set
SniffPort Port2 Sniffer port
Set = An editable parameter (password needed)
1) KeepAlive: The KeepAlive parameter sets in seconds the time between two keepalive packets are sent from the IED.
The setting range for this parameter is between zero (0) and 20 seconds; with the exception that zero (0) means actually
120 seconds (2 minutes). A keep alive’s packet purpose is for the VAMP IED to send a probe packet to a connected client
for checking the status of the TCP-connection when no other packet is being sent e.g. client does not poll data from the
IED. If the keepalive packet is not acknowledged, the IED will close the TCP connection. Connection must be resumed
on the client side.
202 V50/en M/A018

Table 9.5: TCP PORT 1st INST

Protocol Protocol selection for the extension port. Set
DNP3 DNP/TCP
Table 9.6: CP PORT 2nd INST

Ethernet port protocol Protocol selection for the extension port. Set
(TCP PORT 2nd INST) None Command line interface for VAMPSET
DNP3 DNP/TCP
V50/en M/A018 203

9.2 Communication protocols 9 Communication and protocols
9.2 Communication protocols

The protocols enable the transfer of the following type of data:
• events
• status information
• measurements
• control commands.
• clock synchronizing
• Settings (SPA-bus and embedded SPA-bus only)
9.2.1 PC communication
PC communication is using a VAMP specified command line
interface. The VAMPSET program can communicate using the local
USB-port or using optional Ethernet interface.
It is also possible to select SPA-bus protocol for the local port and
configure the VAMPSET to embed the command line interface inside
SPA-bus messages.
For Ethernet configuration, see Chapter 9.1.4 Ethernet port.
204 V50/en M/A018

9 Communication and protocols 9.2 Communication protocols
9.2.2 Modbus TCP and Modbus RTU

These Modbus protocols are often used in power plants and in
industrial applications. The difference between these two protocols
is the media. Modbus TCP uses Ethernet and Modbus RTU uses
asynchronous communication (RS-485, optic fibre, RS-232).
VAMPSET will show the list of all available data items for Modbus.
The Modbus communication is activated usually for remote port via
a menu selection with parameter "Protocol". See Figure 9.1.
For Ethernet interface configuration, see Chapter 9.1.4 Ethernet port.
Addr 1 – 247 Modbus address for the device. Set
Broadcast address 0 can be used for clock synchronizing.

Modbus TCP uses also the TCP port settings.
bit/s 1200 bps Communication speed for Modbus RTU Set
2400
4800
9600
19200
Parity None Parity for Modbus RTU Set
Even
Odd
V50/en M/A018 205

9.2.3 Profibus DP
The Profibus DP protocol is widely used in industry. For the protocol
to be used in the VAMP50-series, an internal optioncard or VPA 3CG
external communication module is required.
Device profile "continuous mode"
In this mode, the device is sending a configured set of data
parameters continuously to the Profibus DP master. The benefit of
this mode is the speed and easy access to the data in the Profibus
master. The drawback is the maximum buffer size of 128 bytes,
which limits the number of data items transferred to the master. Some
PLCs have their own limitation for the Profibus buffer size, which
may further limit the number of transferred data items.
Device profile "Request mode"
Using the request mode it is possible to read all the available data
from the VAMP device and still use only a very short buffer for
Profibus data transfer. The drawback is the slower overall speed of
the data transfer and the need of increased data processing at the
Profibus master as every data item must be separately requested
by the master.
NOTE: In request mode, it is not possible to read continuously only one

single data item. At least two different data items must be read in
turn to get updated data from the device.
There is a separate manual for VPA 3CG (VVPA3CG/EN M/xxxx)

for the continuous mode and request mode. The manual is available
to download from our website.
Available data
VAMPSET will show the list of all available data items for both modes.
A separate document “Profibus parameters.pdf” is also available.
The Profibus DP communication is activated usually for remote port
via a menu selection with parameter "Protocol". See Chapter 9.1
Communication ports.
206 V50/en M/A018


Mode Profile selection Set
Cont Continuous mode
Reqst Request mode
bit/s 2400 bps Communication speed from the main CPU to the Profibus
converter. (The actual Profibus bit rate is automatically set
by the Profibus master and can be up to 12 Mbit/s.)
Emode Event numbering style. (Set)
Channel Use this for new installations.
(Limit60) (The other modes are for compatibility with old systems.)
(NoLimit)
InBuf bytes Size of Profibus master's Rx buffer. (data to the master) 1. 3.
OutBuf bytes Size of Profibus master's Tx buffer. (data from the master) 2. 3.
Addr 1 – 247 This address has to be unique within the Profibus network Set
system.
Conv Forcing flag for converter selection 4. 5. 8.
VE "VE" converter
HMS "HMS" converter
Conv Recognized converter type 6. 7. 8.
- “-” Converter not found
VE “VE” converter found
HMS “HMS” converter found
V50/en M/A018 207

Clr = Clearing to zero is possible

1. In continuous mode the size depends of the biggest configured data offset of a data
item to be send to the master. In request mode the size is 8 bytes.
2. In continuous mode the size depends of the biggest configured data offset of a data
to be read from the master. In request mode the size is 8 bytes.
3. When configuring the Profibus master system, the lengths of these buffers are
needed. The device calculates the lengths according the Profibus data and profile
configuration and the values define the in/out module to be configured for the
Profibus master.
4. Forcing flag for converter-type recognition. Typically, this flag is set at the factory;
users are only required to use this flag when either a new internal option-card or
VPA external communication module are installed.
• If an internal option-card option card is used, the possible converter types are
HMS and VE.
• If the VPA external communication module is used, the only possible converter
type is VE.
5. Internal option-card with “VE” converter is supported from software version 10.115
and later.
6. If the converter type has as value "−" (converter not found), the possible reasons
are:
• The wrong forcing flag was used for converter recognition
• There is a communication problem between the main CPU and the Profibus
ASIC.
7. Each converter type requires an specific gsd-file for installation, for an VE converter,
the gsd-file named VPA_00F7.gsd is needed whereas for the HMS converter, the
HMS_1002.gsd is required. These files are available from the website.
Figure 9.2: Profibus option- 8. Users can recognize which of the converters is available in the delivered internal
card profiles for VAMP50- option-card by observing the profile of the card’s back plate.
Series
208 V50/en M/A018

9.2.4 SPA-bus
The device has full support for the SPA-bus protocol including reading
and writing the setting values. Also reading of multiple consecutive
status data bits, measurement values or setting values with one
message is supported.
Several simultaneous instances of this protocol, using different
physical ports, are possible, but the events can be read by one single
instance only.
There is a separate document “Spabus parameters.pdf” of SPA-bus
data items available.
Addr 1 – 899 SPA-bus address. Must be unique in the system. Set
bit/s 1200 bps Communication speed Set
2400
4800
9600 (default)
19200
Emode Event numbering style. (Set)
Channel Use this for new installations.
(Limit60) (The other modes are for compatibility with old sys-
tems.)
(NoLimit)
V50/en M/A018 209

9.2.5 IEC 60870-5-103

The IEC standard 60870-5-103 "Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment" provides standardized
communication interface to a primary system (master system).
The unbalanced transmission mode of the protocol is used, and the
device functions as a secondary station (slave) in the communication.
Data is transferred to the primary system using "data acquisition by
polling"-principl
The IEC functionality includes application functions:
• station initialization
• general interrogation
• clock synchronization and
• command transmission.
It is not possible to transfer parameter data or disturbance recordings
via the IEC 103 protocol interface.
The following ASDU (Application Service Data Unit) types will be
used in communication from the device:
• ASDU 1: time tagged message
• ASDU 3: Measurands I
• ASDU 5: Identification message
• ASDU 6: Time synchronization and
• ASDU 8: Termination of general interrogation.
The device will accept:
• ASDU 6: Time synchronization
• ASDU 7: Initiation of general interrogation and
• ASDU 20: General command.
The data in a message frame is identified by:
• type identification
• function type and
• information number.
These are fixed for data items in the compatible range of the protocol,
for example, the trip of I> function is identified by: type identification
= 1, function type = 160 and information number = 90. "Private range"
function types are used for such data items, which are not defined
by the standard (e.g. the status of the digital inputs and the control
of the objects).
210 V50/en M/A018

The function type and information number used in private range

messages is configurable. This enables flexible interfacing to different
master systems.
For more information on IEC 60870-5-103 in VAMP devices refer to
the “IEC103 Interoperability List” document.
Addr 1 – 254 An unique address within the system Set
19200
MeasInt 200 – 10000 ms Minimum measurement response interval Set
SyncRe Sync ASDU6 response time mode Set
Sync+Proc
Msg
Msg+Proc
Table 9.11: Parameters for disturbance record reading

ASDU23 On Enable record info message Set
Off
Smpls/msg 1 – 25 Record samples in one message Set
Timeout 10 – 10000 s Record reading timeout Set
Fault Fault identifier number for IEC-103. Starts +
trips of all stages.
TagPos Position of read pointer
Chn Active channel
ChnPos Channel read position
Fault numbering
Faults Total number of faults
GridFlts Fault burst identifier number
Grid Time window to classify faults together to the Set
same burst.
V50/en M/A018 211

9.2.6 DNP 3.0

The relay supports communication using DNP 3.0 protocol. The
following DNP 3.0 data types are supported:
• binary input
• binary input change
• double-bit input
• binary output
• analog input
• counters
Additional information can be obtained from the “DNP 3.0 Device
Profile Document” and “DNP 3.0 Parameters.pdf”. DNP 3.0
communication is activated via menu selection. RS-485 interface is
often used but also RS-232 and fibre optic interfaces are possible.
9600 (default)
19200
38400
Parity None (default) Parity Set
Even
Odd
SlvAddr 1 – 65519 An unique address for the device within the Set
system
MstrAddr 1 – 65519 Address of master Set
255 = default
LLTout 0 – 65535 ms Link layer confirmation timeout Set
LLRetry 1 – 255 Link layer retry count Set
1 = default
APLTout 0 – 65535 ms Application layer confirmation timeout Set
5000 = default
CnfMode EvOnly (default); All Application layer confirmation mode Set
DBISup No (default); Yes Double-bit input support Set
SyncMode 0 – 65535 s Clock synchronization request interval. Set
0 = only at boot
212 V50/en M/A018

9.2.7 IEC 60870-5-101

The IEC 60870-5-101 standard is derived from the IEC 60870-5
protocol standard definition. In VAMP devices, IEC 60870-5-101
communication protocol is available via menu selection. The VAMP
unit works as a controlled outstation (slave) unit in unbalanced mode.
Supported application functions include process data transmission,
event transmission, command transmission, general interrogation,
clock synchronization, transmission of integrated totals, and
acquisition of transmission delay.
For more information on IEC 60870-5-101 in VAMP devices, refer
to the “IEC 101 Profile checklist & datalist.pdf” document.
bit/s 1200 bps Bitrate used for serial communication. Set
2400
4800
9600
Parity None Parity used for serial communication Set
Even
Odd
LLAddr 1 – 65534 Link layer address Set
LLAddrSize 1–2 Bytes Size of Link layer address Set
ALAddr 1 – 65534 ASDU address Set
ALAddrSize 1–2 Bytes Size of ASDU address Set
IOAddrSize 2–3 Bytes Information object address size. (3-octet Set
addresses are created from 2-octet ad-
dresses by adding MSB with value 0.)
COTsize 1 Bytes Cause of transmission size
TTFormat Short The parameter determines time tag format: Set
3-octet time tag or 7-octet time tag.
Full
MeasFormat Scaled The parameter determines measurement Set
data format: normalized value or scaled
Normalized value.
DbandEna No Dead-band calculation enable flag Set
Yes
DbandCy 100 – 10000 ms Dead-band calculation interval Set
V50/en M/A018 213

9.2.8 External I/O (Modbus RTU master)

External Modbus I/O devices can be connected to the relay using
this protocol. (See Chapter 11.8.1 Third-party external input / output
modules module for more information).
9.2.9 IEC 61850

IEC 61850 protocol is available with the optional communication
module. IEC 61850 protocol can be used to read / write static data
from the relay to receive events and to receive / send GOOSE
messages to other relays.
IEC 61850 server interface is capable of
• Configurable data model: selection of logical nodes corresponding
to active application functions
• Configurable pre-defined data sets
• Supported dynamic data sets created by clients
• Supported reporting function with buffered and unbuffered Report
Control Blocks
• Sending analogue values over GOOSE
• Supported control modes:
- direct with normal security
- direct with enhanced security
- select before operation with normal security
- select before operation with enhanced security
• Supported horizontal communication with GOOSE: configurable
GOOSE publisher data sets, configurable filters for GOOSE
subscriber inputs, GOOSE inputs available in the application
logic matrix
Additional information can be obtained from the separate documents
“IEC 61850 conformance statement.pdf”, “IEC 61850 Protocol
data.pdf” and “Configuration of IEC 61850 interface.pdf”.
214 V50/en M/A018

9.2.10 EtherNet/IP
The device supports communication using EtherNet/IP protocol which
is a part of CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) family. EtherNet/IP
protocol is available with the optional inbuilt Ethernet port. The
protocol can be used to read / write data from the device using
request / response communication or via cyclic messages
transporting data assigned to assemblies (sets of data).
For more detailed information and parameter lists for EtherNet/IP,
refer to a separate application note “Application Note
EtherNet/IP.pdf”.
For the complete data model of EtherNet/IP, refer to the document
“Application Note DeviceNet and EtherNetIP Data Model.pdf”.
9.2.11 FTP server

The FTP server is available on VAMP IEDs equipped with an inbuilt
or optional Ethernet card.
The server enables downloading of the following files from an IED:
• Disturbance recordings.
• The MasterICD and MasterICDEd2 files.
The MasterICD and MasterICDEd2 files are VAMP-specific reference
files that can be used for offline IEC61850 configuration.
The inbuilt FTP client in Microsoft Windows or any other compatible
FTP client may be used to download files from the device.
Enable FTP server Yes Enable or disable the FTP server. Set
No
FTP password Max 33 characters Required to access the FTP server with an FTP Set
client. Default is “config”. The user name is al-
ways “vamp”.
FTP max speed 1 – 10 KB/s The maximum speed at which the FTP server Set
will transfer data.
V50/en M/A018 215

9.2.12 DeviceNet
The device supports communication using DeviceNet protocol which
is a part of CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) family. DeviceNet
protocol is available with the optional external VSE009 module. The
protocol can be used to read / write data from the device using
request / response communication or via cyclic messages
transporting data assigned to assemblies (sets of data).
For more detailed information about DeviceNet, refer to a separate
application note “Application Note DeviceNet.pdf”.
For the complete data model of DeviceNet, refer to the document
“Application Note DeviceNet and EtherNetIP Data Model.pdf”.
216 V50/en M/A018

10 Application
10 Application
The following chapters illustrate the functions of the overcurrent and
earth-fault protection relays VAMP 50 and feeder and motor
protection relay VAMP52 in different protection applications.
The relays can be used for line/feeder protection of medium voltage
networks with grounded, low-resistance grounded, isolated or a
compensated neutral point. The relays have all the required functions
to be applied as a backup relay in high voltage networks or to a
transformer differential relay. In addition VAMP 52 includes all the
required functions to be applied as motor protection relay for rotating
machines in industrial protection applications.
The relays provide circuit-breaker control functionality, additional
primary switching devices (earthing switches and disconnector
switches) can also be controlled from the relay HMI or the control or
SCADA/automation system. Programmable logic functionality is also
implemented in the relay for various applications e.g interlockings
schemes. For details about the functionality in the relays, see
Table 1.1.
V50/en M/A018 217

10.1 Substation feeder protection 10 Application
10.1 Substation feeder protection
vamp50app1
Figure 10.1: VAMP 50 used in substation feeder protection.
VAMP 50 includes three-phase overcurrent protection, earth fault

protection and fast arc protection. At the incoming feeder, the
instantaneous stage I>>> of the VAMP feeder device is blocked with
the start signal of the overcurrent stage. This prevents the trip signal
if the fault occurs on the outgoing feeder.
218 V50/en M/A018

10 Application 10.1 Substation feeder protection
vamp50app2
Figure 10.2: VAMP 52 used in substation feeder protection in compensated

network.
For the directional function of earth fault function, the status

information (on/off) of the Petersen coil is routed to one of the digital
inputs of the feeder device so that either I0sinφ or I0cosφ function is
obtained.
The function I0sinφ is used in isolated networks, and the function
I0cosφ is used in resistance or resonant earthed networks.
V50/en M/A018 219

10.2 Industrial feeder / motor protection 10 Application
10.2 Industrial feeder / motor protection
M vamp50app3
Figure 10.3: VAMP 52 feeder/motor protection relay used in cable protection of

an industry plant network
VAMP 52 support directional earth fault protection and three-phase

overcurrent protection which is required in a cable feeder.
Furthermore, the thermal stage can be used to protect the cable
against overloading. All necessary motor protection functions are
supported when using motor application mode. This example also
includes fast arc protection.
220 V50/en M/A018

10 Application 10.3 Trip circuit supervision
10.3 Trip circuit supervision

Trip circuit supervision is used to ensure that the wiring from the
protective device to a circuit-breaker is in order. This circuit is unused
most of the time, but when a protection device detects a fault in the
network, it is too late to notice that the circuit-breaker cannot be
tripped because of a broken trip circuitry.
Also the closing circuit can be supervised, using the same principle.
10.3.1 Trip circuit supervision with one digital input

The benefits of this scheme is that only one digital inputs is needed
and no extra wiring from the relay to the circuit breaker (CB) is
needed. Also supervising a 24 Vdc trip circuit is possible.
The drawback is that an external resistor is needed to supervise the
trip circuit on both CB positions. If supervising during the closed
position only is enough, the resistor is not needed.
• The digital input is connected parallel with the trip contacts
(Figure 10.4).
• The digital input is configured as Normal Closed (NC).
• The digital input delay is configured longer than maximum fault
time to inhibit any superfluous trip circuit fault alarm when the
trip contact is closed.
• The digital input is connected to a relay in the output matrix giving
out any trip circuit alarm.
• The trip relay should be configured as non-latched. Otherwise,
a superfluous trip circuit fault alarm will follow after the trip contact
operates, and the relay remains closed because of latching.
• By utilizing an auxiliary contact of the CB for the external resistor,
also the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit can be supervised.
V50/en M/A018 221

10.3 Trip circuit supervision 10 Application
52b 52a
TCS1DIclosed_1
Figure 10.4: Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input and an external resistor
R. The circuit-breaker is in the closed position. The supervised circuitry in this CB
position is double-lined. The digital input is in active state when the trip circuit is
complete.
NOTE: The need for the external resistor R depends on the application and
circuit breaker manufacturer's specifications.
222 V50/en M/A018

52a
TCS1DIclosed_2
Figure 10.5: Alternative connection without using circuit breaker 52b auxiliary contacts.
Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input and an external resistor R. The
circuit-breaker is in the closed position. The supervised circuitry in this CB position
is double-lined. The digital input is in active state when the trip circuit is complete.
V50/en M/A018 223

52b 52a
TCS1DIopen_1
Figure 10.6: Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input, when the circuit breaker
is in open position.
224 V50/en M/A018

52a
TCS1DIopen_2
Figure 10.7: Alternative connection without using circuit breaker 52b auxiliary contacts.
Trip circuit supervision using a single digital input, when the circuit breaker is in open
position.
Figure 10.8: An example of digital input DI1 configuration for trip circuit supervision
with one digital input.
Figure 10.9: An example of output matrix configuration for trip circuit supervision with
one digital input.
V50/en M/A018 225

Example of dimensioning the external resistor R:

UAUX = 110 Vdc - 20 % + 10%, Auxiliary voltage with tolerance
UDI = 18 Vdc, Threshold voltage of the digital input
IDI = 3 mA, Typical current needed to activate the digital
input including a 1 mA safety margin.
PCOIL = 50 W, Rated power of the open coil of the circuit
breaker. If this value is not known, 0 Ω can be used
for the RCOIL.
UMIN = UAUX - 20 % = 88 V
UMAX = UAUX + 10 % = 121 V
RCOIL = U2AUX / PCOIL = 242 Ω.
The external resistance value is calculated using Equation 10.1.
Equation 10.1:
U MIN − U DI − I DI ⋅ RCoil
R=
I DI
R = (88 – 18 – 0.003 x 242)/0.003 = 23.1 kΩ

(In practice the coil resistance has no effect.)
By selecting the next smaller standard size we get 22 kΩ.
The power rating for the external resistor is estimated using
Equation 10.2 and Equation 10.3. The Equation 10.2 is for the CB
open situation including a 100 % safety margin to limit the maximum
temperature of the resistor.
Equation 10.2:
2
P = 2 ⋅ I DI ⋅R
P = 2 x 0.0032 x 22000 = 0.40 W

Select the next bigger standard size, for example 0.5 W.
When the trip contacts are still closed and the CB is already open,
the resistor has to withstand much higher power (Equation 10.3) for
this short time.
Equation 10.3:
2
U MAX
P=
R
P = 1212 / 22000 = 0.67 W
226 V50/en M/A018

A 0.5 W resistor will be enough for this short time peak power, too.
However, if the trip relay is closed for longer time than a few seconds,
a 1 W resistor should be used.
10.3.2 Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs

The benefits of this scheme is that no external resistor is needed.
The drawbacks are, that two digital inputs from two separate groups
are needed and two extra wires from the relay to the CB compartment
is needed. Additionally the minimum allowed auxiliary voltage is 48
Vdc, which is more than twice the threshold voltage of the dry digital
input, because when the CB is in open position, the two digital inputs
are in series.
• The first digital input is connected parallel with the auxiliary
contact of the open coil of the circuit breaker.
• Another auxiliary contact is connected in series with the circuitry
of the first digital input. This makes it possible to supervise also
the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit.
• The second digital input is connected in parallel with the trip
contacts.
• Both inputs are configured as normal closed (NC).
• The user’s programmable logic is used to combine the digital
input signals with an AND port. The delay is configured longer
than maximum fault time to inhibit any superfluous trip circuit
fault alarm when the trip contact is closed.
• The output from the logic is connected to a relay in the output
matrix giving out any trip circuit alarm.
• Both digital inputs must have their own common potential.
Using the other digital inputs in the same group as the upper DI
in the Figure 10.10 is not possible in most applications. Using
the other digital inputs in the same group as the lower DI in the
Figure 10.10 is limited, because the whole group will be tied to
the auxiliary voltage VAUX.
V50/en M/A018 227

52b 52a
Figure 10.10: Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs. The CB is closed. The
supervised circuitry in this CB position is double-lined. The digital input is in active
state when the trip circuit is complete.
228 V50/en M/A018

52b 52a
Figure 10.11: Trip circuit supervision with two digital inputs. The CB is in the open
position. The two digital inputs are now in series.
Figure 10.12: An example of digital input configuration for trip circuit supervision
with two dry digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
V50/en M/A018 229

Figure 10.13: An example of logic configuration for trip circuit supervision with two
dry digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
Figure 10.14: An example of output matrix configuration for trip circuit supervision
with two digital inputs.
230 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections
11 Connections
11.1 Rear panel
X1
X3
1
8
20
2 7
19
6
3 18
5
17
4 4
16
3
15
5 2
14
1
6 13
12
7
11
8 10
9
9 8
10 7
6
48...230V AC/DC
11 5
4
24VDC
3
X2 2
1
1
2
Figure 11.1: Connections on the rear panel
V50/en M/A018 231

11.1 Rear panel 11 Connections
Terminal X1
No Symbol Description
1 IL1(S1) Phase current L1 (S1)

1
2
3
4
5
6 6 IL3(S2) Phase current L3 (S2)
7 7 Io1 Residual current Io1 common for 1 A and 5 A (S1)
8 8 Io1/5A Residual current Io1 5A (S2)
9 9 Io1/1A Residual current Io1 1A (S2)

10 10 Uo/U12/UL1 See Chapter 7.7 Voltage measurement modes (only VAMP52)
11 11 Uo/U12/UL1 See Chapter 7.7 Voltage measurement modes (only VAMP52)
Terminal X2
1 UAUX Auxiliary voltage

1
2 UAUX Auxiliary voltage
2
232 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.2 Auxiliary voltage
Terminal X3
20 SF NO Internal fault relay, common connector

20
19 SF NC Internal fault relay, normal open connector
19
18 SF COM Internal fault relay, normal closed connector
18
17 T1 Trip relay 1
17
16 T1 Trip relay 1
16
15 T2 Trip relay 2
15
14 T2 Trip relay 2
14
13 T3 Trip relay 3
13
12 12 T3 Trip relay 3
9 9 A1 NC Alarm relay 1, common connector
8 8 A1 NO Alarm relay 1, normal open connector
7 7 A1 COM Alarm relay 1, normal closed connector
6 6 DI2 + Digital inputs
5 5 DI2 - Digital inputs
4 4 DI1 + Digital inputs

3 3 DI1 - Digital inputs
2 2 mA out - Analogue output
1 1 mA out + Analogue output
11.2 Auxiliary voltage

The external auxiliary voltage UAUX (40 – 265 V ac or V dc, or
optionally 18 – 36V dc) for the relay is connected to the pins X2: 1
– 2.
NOTE: When optional 18 – 36 Vdc power module is used the polarity is as

follows: X2:1 positive (+), X2:2 negative (-).
V50/en M/A018 233

11.3 Output relays 11 Connections
11.3 Output relays

The relay is equipped with 5 configurable output relays, and a
separate output relay for the self-supervision system.
• Trip relays T1 – T4 (terminals X3: 10-17)
• Alarm relay A1 (terminals X3: 7-9)
• Self-supervision system output relay IF (terminals X3: 18-20)
11.4 Serial communication connection

The device can be equipped with optional communication module.
The physical location of the module is the lower option card slot at
the back of the relay. The modules can be installed in the field (when
power is first turned off).
There are three “logical communication ports” available in the relay:
REMOTE, LOCAL and EXTENSION. Depending on the module type
one or more of these ports are physically available at the external
connectors.
11.4.1 Front panel USB connector

Pin Signal name
2 1 1 VBUS
2 D-
3
3 D+
4
4 GND
Figure 11.2: Pin numbering of the front Shell Shield
panel USB type B connector
234 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.4 Serial communication connection
11.4.2 Pin assignments of the optional communication

interface cards
The communication card types and their pin assignments are
introduced in the following table.
Type Order code, Name Communication Signal levels Connectors Pin usage
ports
VCM 232 CA REMOTE RS-232 D-connector 2 = TX_REM
RS-232 interface EXTENSION RS-232 3 = RX_REM
5 = TX_EXT
6 = RX_EXT
7 = GND
9 = +12V
VCM 232+ET HA Ethernet Ethernet 10Mbps RJ-45 1=Transmit+
Ethernet interface 2=Transmit-

VCM 232+I6 KA Ethernet Ethernet 10Mbps RJ-45 3=Receive+
IEC 61850 inter- 4=Reserved
face
5=Reserved
6=Receive-
7=Reserved
8=Reserved
VCM 232+00 LA REMOTE RS-232 D-connector 2 = TX_REM
RS-232 interface 3 = RX_REM
7 = GND
9 = +12V
VCM 232+IR LB CLOCK SYNC TTL 2-pole screw con- 1= Data
(IRIG-B ) nector
RS-232 interface 2= GND
with timesyn-
cronisation input
VCM 232+FI LC EXTENSION Light Snap-in connector
RS-232 interface RTD protocol must

with RTD fiber op- be selected for the
tic interface port
VCM 232+ET2 LD Ethernet Ethernet 10Mbps RJ-45 1=Transmit+
RS-232 interface 2=Transmit-

with Ethernet inter-
face 3=Receive+
VCM 232+I62 LE Ethernet Ethernet 10Mbps RJ-45 4=Reserved
RS-232 interface 5=Reserved

with IEC 61850 in-
terface 6=Receive-
7=Reserved
8=Reserved
V50/en M/A018 235

11.4 Serial communication connection 11 Connections
ports
VCM 232+LC LF Ethernet Light 100Mbps LC-connector TX=Lower LC-con-
nector
RS-232 interface
with Ethernet fibre RX=Upper LC-con-
interface nector
VCM 232+L6 LG Ethernet Light 100Mbps LC-connector
RS-232 interface
with IEC 61850
Ethernet fibre inter-
face
VCM 485+00 BA REMOTE RS-485 (2-wire) 3-pole screw con- 1= -
nector
RS-484 interface 2= +
3= GND
VCM 485+IR BB CLOCK SYNC TTL 2-pole screw con- 1= Data
(IRIG-B) nector
RS-485 interface 2= GND
with timesyn-
cronisation input
VCM 485+FI BC EXTENSION Light Snap-in connector
RS-485 interface RTD protocol must

with RTD fiber op- be selected for the
tic interface BC port
VCM 485+ET BD Ethernet Ethernet 10Mbps RJ-45 1=Transmit+
RS-485 interface 2=Transmit-

with Ethernet inter-
face 3=Receive+
VCM 485+I6 BE Ethernet Ethernet 10Mbps RJ-45 4=Reserved
RS-485 interface 5=Reserved

with IEC 61850
Ethernet fibre inter- 6=Receive-
face
7=Reserved
8=Reserved
VCM 485+LC BF Ethernet Light 100Mbps LC-connector TX=Lower LC-con-
nector
RS-485 interface
with Ethernet fibre RX=Upper LC-con-
interface nector
VCM 485+L6 BG Ethernet Light 100Mbps LC-connector
RS-485 interface
with IEC 61850
Ethernet fibre inter-
face
236 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.4 Serial communication connection
ports
VCM FI PP DA REMOTE Light P/P fiber TX=Lower fiber
connector
Plastic/Plastic fibre
interface RX=Upper fiber
connector
VCM FI GG EA REMOTE Light G/G fiber
Glass/Glass fibre
interface
VCM FI PG FA REMOTE Light P/G fiber
Plastic/Glass fibre
interface
VCM FI GP GA REMOTE Light G/P fiber
Glass/Plastic fibre
interface
VCM PB PA REMOTE Profibus DP/RS- D-connector 3=RXD/TXD+/P
485
Profibus interface 5= GND
6=+5V
8= RXD/TXD-/N
VCM ET2xST RA Ethernet Light 100Mbps ST-connector ST-connector from
top:
Double ethernet
fibre interface with -X8 Ethernet 1 Rx
IEC 61850
-X8 Ethernet 1 Tx
-X7 Ethernet 2 Rx
-X7 Ethernet 2 Tx
VCM ET2xRJ SA Ethernet Ethernet 100Mbps RJ-45 1=Transmit+
Double ethernet in- 2=Transmit-

terface with IEC
61850 3=Receive+
4=Reserved
5=Reserved
6=Receive-
7=Reserved
8=Reserved
V50/en M/A018 237

11.5 Input/output card B = 4 x DI + 1 x DI/DO 11 Connections
11.5 Input/output card B = 4 x DI + 1 x DI/DO

The digital input/output option “B = 4 x DI + 1 x DI/DO" enables four
more digital inputs and one optional digital input / output contact.
This card enables use of digital inputs DI3 – DI7. In case DI7 is not
used as digital input then it can be used as additional output T5, but
not simultaneously.
NOTE: Pay special attention when using DI7 (terminals numbers X6:1 –
X6:2) as digital input use. Never configure, operate or control T5
output if DI7 is used as an imput. Should the control of T5 happen
the output contact will short-circuit DI7 and will lead to equipment
damage and loss of data.
For this block information, please see Figure 11.6.

When this option card is installed to slot X6, the CARD INFO view
indicates value “4DI + 1DO” for parameter “I/O card” in HMI and
VAMPSET. In case arc sensor card is chosen for slot X6 then this
I/O card cannot be used.
Digital inputs of the device can operate in three different voltage
areas. It is also possible to select whether ac or dc –voltage is used.
Digital input threshold of the device is selected in the ordering code
when the relay(s) are being ordered.
When 110 or 220 V ac voltage is used to activate the digital Inputs,
the AC mode should be selected as shown in the screenshot below:
Figure 11.3: AC mode selection in VAMPSET
11.6 Arc protection card C = Arc (2 x Arc

sensor + BIO)
NOTE: When this option card is installed, the parameter "I/O" has value
"VOM Arc+BI". Please check the Chapter 14 Order information.
The arc sensors are connected to terminals X6: 5 – 6 and 7 – 8.
input and output channels. This is a 48 V dc signal.
back of the unit.
238 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.7 Arc protection card D = Advanced arc (3 x Arc sensor + BIO)

connected devices.
system.
11.7 Arc protection card D = Advanced arc (3

x Arc sensor + BIO)
NOTE: When this option card is installed, the parameter "I/O" has value
"3S+1BI+1BO". Please check the Chapter 14 Order information.
The arc sensors are connected to terminals X6: 6 – 7, 8 – 9 and 10
– 11.
input and output channels. This is a 48 V dc signal.
back of the unit.
connected devices.
system.
V50/en M/A018 239

11.8 External option modules 11 Connections
11.8 External option modules
11.8.1 Third-party external input / output modules

The device supports also external input / output modules used to
extend the number of digital/analog inputs and outputs.
The following types of devices are supported:
• Analog input modules (RTD)
• Analog output modules (mA-output)
• Binary input/output modules
EXTENSION port is primarily designed for I/O modules. The relay
must have a communication option card with EXTENSION port.
Depending of the option card I/O devices may require an adapter to
be able to connect to the port (i.e. VSE004).
NOTE: If External I/O protocol is not selected to any communication port,

VAMPSET doesn’t display the menus required for configuring the
I/O devices. After changing EXTENSION port protocol to External
I/O, restart the relay and read all settings with VAMPSET.
240 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.8 External option modules
External analog inputs configuration (VAMPSET only)

Range Description
Communication read errors
-
Scaling Y2 Scaled value Point 2
-
X2 Modbus value
X: -32000 – 32000 -
Y: -1000 – 1000 Y1 Scaled value Point 1
-
X1 Modbus value
-
Offset Subtracted from Modbus value, before
-32000 – 32000
running XY scaling
-
-
- -
InputR or HoldingR Modbus register type
-
- -
1 – 9999 Modbus register for the measurement
-
- -
- -
1 – 247 Modbus address of the I/O device
-
C, F, K, mA, Ohm or V/A Unit selection
- -
-
Active value
- -
On / Off Enabling for measurement
V50/en M/A018 241

Alarms for external analog inputs

Range Description
- -
0 – 10000 Hysteresis for alarm limits
-
- Alarm >> -
-21x107 – +21x107 Limit setting
-
- -
- / Alarm Active state
-
- Alarm > -
-21x107 – +21x107 Limit setting
-
- -
- / Alarm Active state
-
-
Active value
- -
- -
-
- -
-
Analog input alarms have also matrix signals, “Ext. Aix Alarm1” and
“Ext. Aix Alarm2”.
242 V50/en M/A018

External digital inputs configuration (VAMPSET only)

Range Description
-
Communication read errors
-
-
1 – 16 Bit number of Modbus register value
-
- -
- Modbus register type
CoilS, InputS,
InputR or HoldingR
-
- -
-
- -
-
- -
- -
0/1 Active state
- -
V50/en M/A018 243

External digital outputs configuration (VAMPSET only)

Range Description
-
Communication errors
-
- -
- -
-
- -
- -
-
- -
- -
0/1 Output state
-
- Enabling for measurement
244 V50/en M/A018

External analog outputs configuration (VAMPSET only)

Range Description
-
Communication errors
-
-
Modbus value corresponding Linked Val. Max
-32768 – +32767 -
(0 – 65535) -
Modbus value corresponding Linked Val. Min
-
- -
InputR or HoldingR Modbus register type
-
- -
1 – 9999 Modbus register for the output
-
- -
-
-
Maximum limit for lined value, corresponding to “Modbus Max”
0 – 42x108, -
-21x108 – +21x108 -
Minimum limit for lined value, corresponding to “Modbus Min”
-
-
Link selection
-
- -
-21x107 – +21x107 Minimum & maximum output values
-
-
Active value
-
V50/en M/A018 245

11.9 Block optional diagrams 11 Connections
11.9 Block optional diagrams
11.9.1 VAMP 50
X2:1
~
VAMP 50 Front
X2:2 Protection functions Comm. option
50 / 51 59
Remote
I> U>
I>> U>>
I>>> U>>>
X1:1
X1:2 IL1 46 68F2
X3:17
I 2> IF2> T1
X1:3
46 68F5 X3:16
X1:4 IL2 I2/I1> IF5> T2 X3:15
X1:5 47 50BF X3:14

X1:6 IL3
I2>> CBFP
X3:13
T3
X1:7 49 99
X3:12
* T> Prg 1...8
X1:8 I0 5A T4 X3:11
1A 37 50ARC
X1:9 I< ArcI> X3:10
A1 X3:7
50N/51N 50NARC
ArcI0>
X3:9
I0>
I/O extension I0>> X3:8
module I0>>>
79
I0>>>>
X6:1 Auto Reclose
X6:2
Arc option
X6:3
X6:4 or
X6:5 DI / DO module
SF X3:18
X6:6
X6:7 X3:19
X6:8 Autorecloser Blocking and X3:20
matrix output matrix
mA out option
X3:3 DI1 - X3:1 AO+

X3:4 DI1+ DI X3:2 AO -
mA
X3:5 DI2 -
X3:6 DI2+
* order option
I0
1A
0.2A
VAMP50Blockdiagram
Figure 11.4: Block diagram of overcurrent and earthfault protection relay VAMP 50.
246 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.9 Block optional diagrams
11.9.2 VAMP 52
X2:1
~ VAMP 52 Front
X2:2 Protection functions Comm. option
Remote
50/51 50N/51N 27
I> I 0> U<

I>> I0>> U<<
X1:1 I>>> I0>>> U<<<
X1:2 IL1
I0>>>>
X3:17
46 68F2 T1
X1:3 I 2>
67NT
IF2>
X3:16
X1:4 IL2 X3:15
I0T>
46 68F5 T2
I2/I1> IF5>
67N
X1:5 X3:14
I0φ>
X1:6 IL3
50BF
X3:13
47
I2>>
I0φ>>
CBFP T3
X1:7 X3:12
* 59N
99
X1:8 I0
48 U 0>
X3:11
5A
1A
IST> U0>>
Prg 1...8
T4
X1:9 50ARC X3:10
66 59
ArcI>
X1:10 X3:7
U0 /UL 1/
N> U>
U>>
A1
50NARC
X1:11 U12 49 U>>>
X3:9
ArcI0>
T>
X3:8
I/O extension
37 79
module
I< Auto Reclose
X6:1
X6:2
Arc option
X6:3
X6:4 or
X3:18
X6:5 DI / DO module
SF
X6:6 X3:19
X6:7 X3:20
X6:8 Autorecloser Blocking and
matrix output matrix mA out option
X3:3 DI1 - X3:1 AO+

X3:4 DI1+ DI X3:2 AO -
mA
X3:5 DI2 -
X3:6 DI2+
* order option
I0
1A
0.2A
VAMP52Blockdiagram
Figure 11.5: Block diagram of feeder/motor protection relay VAMP 52.
V50/en M/A018 247

11.10 Block diagrams of optional modules 11 Connections
11.10 Block diagrams of optional modules

B = 4 x DI + 1 x DI/DO
X6:1 +DI7 / T5
X6:2 -DI7 / T5
X6:3 DI3
X6:4 COMM
X6:5 DI4
X6:6 DI5
X6:7 COMM
X6:8 DI6
Figure 11.6: Block diagram of optional module “B = Digital I/O; 4 x DI + 1 x DI/DO”
C = 2 x Arc sensor + BIO

A rc option
X6:1 BO+ BI/ O
X6:2 BO-
X6:3 BI+
X6:4 BI-
X6:5 L1 +
L>
X6:6 L1 -
X6:7 L2+
X6:8 L2-
Figure 11.7: Block diagram of optional arc protection card C = Arc (2 x Arc sensor
+ BIO)
248 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.10 Block diagrams of optional modules
D = 3 x Arc sensor + BIO

Arc option
X6:1 BO1+ BI/O
X6:2 BO1-
X6:3 BI1+
X6:4 BI1-
X6:5 n/a
X6:6 S1
X6:7 S1 L>
X6:8 S2
X6:9 S2
X6:10 S3
X6:11 S3
Figure 11.8: Block diagram of advanced optional arc protection card D = Advanced
Arc (3 x Arc sensor + BIO)
For more information, please see Chapter 14 Order information.
V50/en M/A018 249

11.11 Connection examples 11 Connections
11.11 Connection examples
11.11.1 VAMP 50
L1
L2
L3
+
1 -
X2:1
~
Front - 0
X2:2 Comm. option
Remote
VAMP 50
X1:1
X1:2 IL1 T1
X3:17
X1:3 X3:16 +
X1:4 IL2 T2 X3:15
X1:5 X3:14 +
X1:6 IL3 T3 X3:13
X1:7 X3:12
X1:8 I0 5A T4 X3:11
X1:9 1A
X3:10
A1 X3:7
X3:9
I/O extension
X3:8
module
X6:1
X6:2
Arc option
X6:3
X6:4 or SF X3:18
X6:5 X3:19
DI / DO module
X6:6
X6:7
X3:20
mA out option
X6:8
X3:3 DI1 - X3:1 AO+

DI
X3:4 DI1 + X3:2 AO-
mA
X3:5 DI2 -
X3:6 DI2 +
Figure 11.9: Connection example of overcurrent and earthfault protection relay
250 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.11 Connection examples
11.11.2 VAMP 52
L1
L2
L3
+ 1 -
X2:1
~
Front - 0
X2:2 Comm. option
Remote
VAMP 52
X1:1
X1:2 IL1 T1
X3:17
X1:3 X3:16
X1:4 IL2 T2 X3:15 +
X1:5 X3:14 +
X1:6 IL3 T3 X3:13
X1:7 X3:12
dn da
I
X1:8 0 5A T4 X3:11
X1:9 1A
X3:10
X1:10
A1 X3:7
U0 X1:11 U0/UL1/U12 X3:9
I/O extension
X3:8
module
X6:1
X6:2
Arc option
X6:3
X6:4 or SF X3:18
X6:5 X3:19
DI / DO module
X6:6
X6:7
X3:20
mA out option
X6:8
X3:3 DI1 - X3:1 AO+

DI
X3:4 DI1 + X3:2 AO-
mA
X3:5 DI2 -
X3:6 DI2 +
Figure 11.10: Connection example of motor / feeder protection relay VAMP 52, using
U0.The voltage meas. mode is set to “U0”.
V50/en M/A018 251

11.11 Connection examples 11 Connections
L1
L2
L3
+ 1 -
X2:1
~
Front - 0
X2:2 Comm. option
Remote
VAMP 52
X1:1
X1:2 IL1 T1
X3:17
X1:3 X3:16
X1:4 IL2 X3:15 +
T2
X1:5 X3:14 +
X1:6 IL3 T3 X3:13
X1:7 * X3:12
X1:8 0 5AI T4 X3:11
X1:9 1A
X3:10
X1:10
A1 X3:7
U12 X1:11 U0/UL1/U12 X3:9
I/O extension
X3:8
module
X6:1
X6:2
Arc option
X6:3
X6:4 or SF X3:18
X6:5 X3:19
DI / DO module
X6:6
X6:7
X3:20
mA out option
X6:8
X3:3 DI1 - X3:1 AO+

DI
X3:4 DI1 + X3:2 AO-
mA
X3:5 DI2 -
X3:6 DI2 +
U12. The voltage meas. mode is set to “1LL”.
252 V50/en M/A018

11 Connections 11.11 Connection examples
L1
L2
L3
+ 1 -
X2:1
~
Front - 0
X2:2 Comm. option
Remote
VAMP 52
X1:1
X1:2 IL1 T1
X3:17
X1:3 X3:16
X1:4 IL2 T2 X3:15 +
X1:5 X3:14
+
X1:6 IL3 T3 X3:13
X1:7 * X3:12
I
X1:8 0 5A T4 X3:11
X1:9 1A
X3:10
X1:10
A1 X3:7
UL1 X1:11 U0/UL1/U12 X3:9
I/O extension
X3:8
module
X6:1
X6:2
Arc option
X6:3
X6:4 or SF X3:18
X6:5 X3:19
DI / DO module
X6:6
X6:7
X3:20
mA out option
X6:8
X3:3 DI1 - X3:1 AO+

DI
X3:4 DI1 + X3:2 AO-
mA
X3:5 DI2 -
X3:6 DI2 +
UL1. The voltage meas. mode is set to “1LN”.
V50/en M/A018 253

12 Technical data
12 Technical data
12.1 Connections
Table 12.1: Measuring circuits
Phase current inputs -
Rated phase current 5 A (configurable for CT secondaries 1 – 10 A)
- Current measuring range 0.05 – 250 A
- Thermal withstand 20 A (continuously)
- 100 A (for 10 s)
- 500 A (for 1 s)
- Burden 0.075 VA
- Impedance 0.003 Ohm

I0 input (5 A) -
Rated residual current 5 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1 – 10 A)
- 100 A (for 10 s)
- 500 A (for 1 s)
- Burden 0.075 VA

I0 input (1 A) -
Rated residual current 1 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1 – 10.0 A)
- 20 A (for 10 s)
- 100 A (for 1 s)
- Burden 0.02 VA

I0 input (0.2 A) -
Rated residual current 0.2 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1 – 10.0 A)
- Thermal withstand 0.8 A (continuously)
- 4 A (for 10 s)
- 20 A (for 1 s)
- Burden 0.02 VA
254 V50/en M/A018

12 Technical data 12.1 Connections
Rated voltage UN (only VAMP 52) 100 V (configurable for VT secondaries 50 – 120 V)
- Voltage measuring range 0 – 175 V
- Continuous voltage withstand 250 V
- Burden < 0.5 VA

Frequency -
Rated frequency fN 45 – 65 Hz (protection operates accurately)
Measuring range 16 – 95 Hz
< 44Hz / > 66Hz (other protection is not steady except

frequency protection)
Table 12.2: Auxiliary voltage

Type A (standard) Type B (option)
Rated voltage UAUX 40 – 265 V ac/dc 18 – 36 V dc
Note! Polarity
X2:1= positive (+)
X2:2= negative (-)

Start-up peak (DC) -
24 V (Type B) 25 A with time constant of 1000 µs
110 V (Type A) 15 A with time constant of 500 µs
220 V (Type A) 25 A with time constant of 750 µs

Power consumption < 15 W (normal conditions)
- < 25 W (output relays activated)
Max. permitted interruption time < 50 ms (110 V dc)

Terminal block: Maximum wire dimension:
- Phoenix MVSTBW or equivalent 2.5 mm2 (13 – 14 AWG)
Table 12.3: Digital inputs internal operating voltage

Number of inputs 2
Voltage withstand 265 V ac/dc
External operating voltage, threshold 1: 24 – 230 V ac/dc (max. 265 V ac/dc)
2: 110 – 230 V ac/dc (max. 265 V ac/dc)
3: 220 – 230 V ac/dc (max. 265 V ac/dc)

Typical switching threshold 1: 12 V dc
2: 75 V dc
3: 155 V dc
Current drain approx. 3 mA
Activation time dc/ac < 11 ms / < 15 ms
Reset time dc/ac < 11 ms / < 15 ms
Terminal block: Maximum wire dimension:
- MSTB2.5 – 5.08 2.5 mm2 (13 – 14 AWG)
NOTE: set dc/ac mode according to the used voltage in VAMPSET.

V50/en M/A018 255
12.1 Connections 12 Technical data
Table 12.4: Trip contact, Tx

Number of contacts 4 making contacts (relays T1, T2, T3, T4)
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5A
Make and carry, 0.5 s 30 A
Make and carry, 3s 15 A
Breaking capacity, DC (L/R=40ms)

at 48 V dc: 1.15 A
at 110 V dc: 0.5 A
at 220 V dc: 0.25 A
Contact material AgNi 90/10

Terminal block: Wire dimension:
- MSTB2.5 - 5.08 Maximum 2.5 mm2 (13 – 14 AWG)
Minimum 1.5 mm2 (15 – 16 AWG)
Table 12.5: Signal contacts

Number of contacts: 2 change-over contacts (relays A1 and SF)
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5A
Breaking capacity, DC (L/R=40ms)

at 48 V dc: 1A
at 110 V dc: 0.3 A
at 220 V dc: 0.15 A
Contact material AgNi 0.15 gold plated

Terminal block Wire dimension
- MSTB2.5 - 5.08 Maximum 2.5 mm2 (13 – 14 AWG)
Minimum 1.5 mm2 (15 – 16 AWG)
Table 12.6: Local serial communication port

Number of ports 1 on front
Electrical connection USB
Data transfer rate 2 400 – 187 500 kb/s
256 V50/en M/A018

12 Technical data 12.1 Connections
Table 12.7: Remote control connection (option)

Number of ports 1 option slot on rear panel
Electrical connection RS 485
RS 232
Plastic fibre connection
Glass fibre connection
Ethernet 10 Base-T
Protocols Modbus, RTU master
Modbus, RTU slave
SPA-bus, slave
IEC 60870-5-103
Profibus DP (external module)
IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-101 TCP
DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 TCP
IEC 61850
Ethernet IP
Table 12.8: Arc protection interface (option)

Number of arc sensor inputs 2
Sensor type to be connected VA 1 DA
Operating voltage level 12 V dc
Current drain, when active > 11.9 mA
Current drain range 1.3 – 31 mA (Note! If the drain is outside the

range, either sensor or the wiring is defected)
Number of binary inputs 1 (optically isolated)
Operating voltage level +48 V dc

Number of binary outputs 1 (transistor controlled)
Operating voltage level +48 V dc
NOTE: Maximally three arc binary inputs can be connected to one arc binary
output without an external amplifier.
V50/en M/A018 257

12.1 Connections 12 Technical data
Table 12.9: Analogue output connection (option)

Number of analogue mA output chan- 1
nels
Maximum output current 1 – 20 mA, step 1 mA
Minimum output current 0 – 19 mA, step 1 mA
Exception output current 0 – 20.50 mA, step 25 µA
Resolution 10 bit
Current step < 25 µA
Inaccuracy ±80 µA
Response time -
- normal mode < 400 ms
- fast mode < 50 ms

Burden < 600 Ω
Table 12.10: Ethernet fiber interface

Type Multimode
Connector LC for single FO Ethernet
ST for double FO Ethernet

Physical layer 100 Base-Fx
Maximum cable distance 2 km
Optical wavelength 1300 nm
Cable core / cladding size 50/125 or 62.5/125 μm
258 V50/en M/A018

12 Technical data 12.2 Test and environmental conditions
12.2 Test and environmental conditions

Table 12.11: Disturbance tests
Test Standard & Test class / level Test value
Emission EN 61000-6-4 / IEC 60255-26
- Conducted EN 55011, Class A / IEC 60255-25 0.01 – 30 MHz
- Emitted EN 55011, Class A / IEC 60255-25 / CISPR 11 30 – 1000 MHz
Immunity EN 61000-6-2 / IEC 60255-26
- 1Mhz damped oscillatory wave IEC 60255-22-1 ±2.5kVp CM, ±1.0kVp DM
- Static discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 Level 4 / IEC 60255-22-2 Class ±8 kV contact, ±15 kV air
4
- Emitted HF field EN 61000-4-3 Level 3 / IEC 60255-22-3 80 - 2700 MHz, 10 V/m
- Fast transients (EFT) EN 61000-4-4 Level 4 / 3 / IEC 60255-22-4 Class 4 kV / Signal ports 2.0 kV , 5/50 ns,
A 5 kHz
- Surge EN 61000-4-5 Level 3 / IEC 60255-22-5 2 kV, 1.2/50 µs, CM
1 kV, 1.2/50 µs, DM

- Conducted HF field EN 61000-4-6 Level 3 / IEC 60255-22-6 0.15 - 80 MHz, 10 Vemf
- Power-frequency magnetic field EN 61000-4-8 300A/m (continuous), 1000A/m 1-
3s
- Pulse magnetic field EN 61000-4-9 Level 5 1000A/m, 1.2/50 µs
- Voltage dips EN 61000-4-29 / IEC 60255-11 30%/1s, 60%/0.1s, 100%/0.01s
- Voltage short interruptions EN 61000-4-11 30%/10ms, 100%/10ms,
60%/100ms, 95%/5000ms
- Voltage alternative component EN 61000-4-17 / IEC 60255-11 12% of operating voltage (DC) /
10min
Table 12.12: Electrical safety tests

- Impulse voltage withstand EN 60255-5, Class III 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
1 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J Communica-

tion
- Dielectric test EN 60255-5, Class III 2 kV, 50 Hz
0.5 kV, 50 Hz Communication

- Insulation resistance EN 60255-5
- Protective bonding resistance EN 60255-27
- Power supply burden IEC 60255-1
Table 12.13: Mechanical tests

Device in operation
- Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1, Class II / IEC 60068-2-6, Fc 1Gn, 10Hz – 150 HZ
- Shocks IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / IEC 60068-2-27, Ea 10Gn/11ms
Device de-energized
- Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1, Class II / IEC 60068-2-6, Fc 2Gn, 10Hz – 150 HZ
- Shocks IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / IEC 60068-2-27, Ea 30Gn/11ms
- Bump IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / IEC 60068-2-27, Ea 20Gn/16ms
V50/en M/A018 259

12.2 Test and environmental conditions 12 Technical data
Table 12.14: Environmental tests

Device in operation
- Dry heat EN / IEC 60068-2-2, Bd 65°C (149°F)
- Cold EN / IEC 60068-2-1, Ad -40°C (-40°F)
- Damp heat, cyclic EN / IEC 60068-2-30, Db
• From 25°C (77°F) to 55°C
(131°F)
• From 93% RH to 98% RH
• Testing duration: 6 days
- Damp heat, static EN / IEC 60068-2-78, Cab
• 40°C (104°F)
• 93% RH
• Testing duration: 10 days
Flowing mixed gas corrosion test, IEC 60068-2-60, Ke 25°C (77°F), 75% RH,
method 2
10 ppb H2S, 200 ppb NO2,
10 ppb CL2
Flowing mixed gas corrosion test, IEC 60068-2-60, Ke 25°C (77°F), 75% RH,
method 4
10 ppb H2S, 200 ppb NO2,
10 ppb CL2, 200 ppb SO2
Device in storage
- Dry heat EN / IEC 60068-2-2, Bb 75°C (167°F)
- Cold EN / IEC 60068-2-1, Ab -40°C (-40°F)
Table 12.15: Environmental conditions

Ambient temperature, in-service -40 – 65°C (-40 – 149°F)
Ambient temperature, storage -40 – 70°C (-40 – 158°F)
Relative air humidity < 95%, no condensation allowed
Maximum operating altitude 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
Table 12.16: Casing

Degree of protection (IEC 60529) IP54 front panel, IP 20 rear panel
Dimensions (w x h x d): 130 x 170 x 210 mm / 5.12 x 6.69 x 8.27 in
Material 1 mm (0.039 in) steel plate
Weight 2.0 kg (4.415 lb)
Colour code RAL 7032 (Casing) / RAL 7035 (Back plate)
Table 12.17: Package

Dimensions (W x H x D) 230 x 215 x 175 mm / 9.06 x 8.46 x 6.89 in
Weight (Terminal, Package and 3.0 kg (6.623 lb)
Manual)
260 V50/en M/A018

12 Technical data 12.3 Protection functions
12.3 Protection functions

NOTE: Please see Chapter 5.4 Current protection function dependencies
for explanation of IMODE.
*) EI = Extremely Inverse, NI = Normal Inverse, VI = Very Inverse, LTI = Long Time Inverse,
MI= Moderately Inverse
**) This is the instantaneous time i.e. the minimum total operational time including the
fault detection time and operation time of the trip contacts.
12.3.1 Non-directional current protection

Table 12.18: Overcurrent stage I> (50/51)
Pick-up value 0.05 – 5.00 x IMODE (step 0.01)
Definite time function: DT**
- Operating time 0.04 – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IDMT function:
- Delay curve family (DT), IEC, IEEE, RI Prg
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI…, depends on the family*
- Time multiplier k 0.05 – 20.0, except
0.50 – 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2
Start time Typically 30 ms

Reset time <95 ms
Retardation time < 50 ms
Reset ratio: 0.97
Transient over-reach, any τ < 10 %
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±3% of the set value or 5 mA secondary
- Operating time at definite time function ±1% or ±25 ms
- Operating time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±25 ms**
V50/en M/A018 261

12.3 Protection functions 12 Technical data
Table 12.19: Overcurrent stage I>> (50/51)

Operating time 0.04 – 1800.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio: 0.97
Transient over-reach, any τ < 10 %
Inaccuracy: -
- Operation time ±1% or ±25 ms
Table 12.20: Overcurrent stages I>>> (50/51)

Operating time 0.03 – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Instant operation time: -
IM / ISET ratio > 1.5 <30 ms
IM / ISET ratio 1.03 – 1.5 < 50 ms

Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio: 0.97
Inaccuracy:
- Operation time DT (IM/ISET ratio > 1.5) ±1% or ±15 ms
- Operation time DT (IM/ISET ratio 1.03 – 1.5) ±1% or ±25 ms
262 V50/en M/A018

Table 12.21: Stall protection stage (48)

Setting range: -
- Motor start detection current 1.30 – 10.00 x IMOT (step 0.01)
- Nominal motor start current 1.50 – 10.00 x IMOT (step 0.01)

Delay type: DT, INV
Definite time characteristic (DT): -
- Operating time 1.0 – 300.0 s (step 0.1)**)
Inverse time characteristic (INV):

- operation delay 1.0 – 300.0 s (step 0.1)
- Inverse time coefficient, k 1.0 – 200.0 s (step 0.1)
Minimum motor stop time to activate stall 500 ms

protection
Maximum current raise time from motor stop 200 ms
to start
Motor stopped limit 0.10 x IMOT
Motor running lower limit 0.20 x IMOT
Motor running limit after starting 1.20 x IMOT
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio: 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Operating time at definite time function ±1% or at ±30 ms
- Operating time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms
NOTE: Motor stopped and running limits are based on the average of three phase currents.
Table 12.22: Thermal overload stage T> (49)

Maximum continuous current: 0.1 – 2.40 x IMODE (step 0.01)
Alarm setting range: 60 – 99 % (step 1%)
Time constant Tau: 2 – 180 min (step 1)
Cooling time coefficient: 1.0 – 10.0 x Tau (step 0.1)
Max. overload at +40°C 70 – 120 %IMODE (step 1)
Max. overload at +70°C 50 – 100 %IMODE (step 1)
Ambient temperature -55 – 125°C (step 1°)
Resetting ratio (Start & trip) 0.95
Accuracy: -
- Operating time ±5% or ±1 s
V50/en M/A018 263

Table 12.23: Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode

Pick-up value 2 – 70% (step 1%)
Definite time characteristic: -

Inverse time characteristic: -
- 1 characteristic curve Inv
- time multiplier 1 – 50 s (step 1)
- upper limit for inverse time 1000 s

Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio: 0.95
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±1% - unit
- Operate time ±5% or ±200 ms
NOTE: Stage is operational when all secondary currents are above 250 mA.
Table 12.24: Incorrect phase sequence I2>> (47)

Setting: 80 % (fixed)
Operating time <120 ms
Reset time < 105 ms
NOTE: Stage is blocked when motor has been running for 2 seconds.
Stage is operational only when least one of the currents is above 0.2 x IMOT
Table 12.25: Undercurrent protection stage I< (37)

Current setting range: 20 – 70 %IMODE (step 1%)
- Operating time 0.3 – 300.0 s (step 0.1)

Block limit 15 % (fixed)
Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio: 1.05
Accuracy:
- Starting ±2% of set value or ±0.5% of the rated value
- Operating time ±1 % or ±150 ms
NOTE: Stage Blocking is functional when all phase currents are below the block limit.
264 V50/en M/A018

Table 12.26: Current unbalance stage I2/I1> (46) in feeder mode

Settings: -
- Setting range I2 / I1> 2 – 70% (step 1%)

Definite time function: -

Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio: 0.95
Inaccuracy: -
Table 12.27: Earth fault stage I0> (50N/51N)

Input signal I0 (input X1:7 – 8 or input X1:7 – 9)
I0Calc (= IL1 + IL2 + IL3)

Pick-up value 0.005 – 8.00 pu (when I0) (step 0.001)
0.05 – 20.0 pu (when I0Calc)

- Operating time 0.04** – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IDMT function:
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI..., depends on the family*
0.50 – 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2

Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio: 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±2% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated
value
- Starting (Peak mode) ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Operating time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±25 ms**
V50/en M/A018 265

Table 12.28: Earth fault stages I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>> (50N/51N)

Input signal I0 (input X1:7 – 8 or input X1:7 – 9)

Pick-up value 0.01 – 8.00 pu (When I0) (step 0.01)
0.05 – 20.0 pu (When I0Calc) (step 0.01)


Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio: 0.95
Inaccuracy:
value
- Starting (Peak mode) ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
Table 12.29: Directional intermittent transient earth fault stage I0INT> (67NI)
Input selection for I0 peak signal I0 Connectors X1:7 – 8 or X1:7 – 9
Direction selection Forward
Reverse
I0 peak pick up level (fixed) 0.1 pu @ 50 Hz
U0 pickup level 1 – 60 %U0N (step 1%)
Definite operating time 0.02 – 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Intermittent time 0.01 – 300.00 s (step 0.01)
Reset time 0.06 – 300 s
Reset ratio (hysteresis) for U0 0.97
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±3% for U0. No inaccuracy defined for I0
transients
- time ±1% or ±30 ms (The actual operation time
depends of the intermittent behaviour of the
fault and the intermittent time setting.)
NOTE: Only when measurement option is 1Line (line-to-line voltage) or 1Phase

(phase-to-neutral voltage). A complete three phase voltage protection is not
possible with VAMP 52.
266 V50/en M/A018

12.3.2 Directional current protection

Table 12.30: Directional earth fault stages I0φ>, I0φ>> (67N)
Pick-up value 0.005 – 20.00 x I0N (up to 8.00 for inputs other
than I0Calc)
Start voltage 1 – 50 %U0N (step 1%)
Input signal I0 (input X1:7 – 8 or X1:7 – 9)

Mode Non-directional/Sector/ResCap
Base angle setting range -180° – 179°
Operation angle ±88°
IDMT function:
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI…, depends on the family*
0.50 – 20.0 for RI, IEEE and IEEE2

Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio: 0.95
Reset ratio (angle) 2°
Inaccuracy:
- Starting U0 & I0 (rated value In= 1 – 5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated
value
- Starting U0 & I0 (Peak Mode when, rated ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated value
value I0n= 1 – 10A) (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Starting U0 & I0 (I0Calc) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle ±2° when U> 1V and I0> 5% of I0N or > 50 mA
else ±20°
- Operate time at definite time function ±1% or ±30 ms
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms**
12.3.3 Frequent start protection

Table 12.31: Frequent start protection N> (66)
Settings: -
- Max motor starts 1 – 20
- Min time between motor starts 0.0 – 100 min. (step 0.1 min)
V50/en M/A018 267

12.3.4 Voltage protection

Table 12.32: Single-phase overvoltage stage U> (59)
Pick-up value 50 – 150 %UN (step 1%)
- Operating time 0.08** – 300.00 s (step 0.02)

Hysteresis 0.99 – 0.800 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Release delay 0.06 – 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Reset time <95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±3% of the set value
- operate time ±1% or ±30 ms
Table 12.33: Single-phase overvoltage stage U>> (59)


Hysteresis 0.99 – 0.800 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Reset time <95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
Table 12.34: Single-phase overvoltage stage U>>> (59)


Hysteresis 0.99 – 0.800 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Reset time <95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
NOTE: Only when measurement option is 1Line (line-to-line voltage) or 1Phase

(phase-to-neutral voltage). A complete three phase voltage protection is not
possible with VAMP 52.
268 V50/en M/A018

Table 12.35: Single-phase undervoltage stage U< (27)


Hysteresis 1.001 – 1.200 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Self-blocking value of the undervoltage 0 – 80 %UN
Release delay 0.06 – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio (Block limit) 0.5 V or 1.03 (3 %)
Reset ratio: 1.03 (depends on the hysteresis setting)
Inaccuracy: -
- blocking ±3% of set value or ±0.5 V
Table 12.36: Single-phase undervoltage stage U<< (27)


Hysteresis 1.001 – 1.200 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Self-blocking value of the undervoltage 0 – 80 %UN
Reset time <95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
V50/en M/A018 269

Table 12.37: Single-phase undervoltage stage U<<< (27)


Hysteresis 1.001 – 1.200 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Self-blocking value of the undervoltage 0 - 80 %UN
Reset time <95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
NOTE: 1. This is only available in voltage measurement mode U0.

2. Only when measurement option is 1Line (line-to-line voltage) or 1Phase
(phase-to-neutral voltage). A complete three phase voltage protection is
not possible with VAMP 52.
Table 12.38: Zero sequence voltage stage U0> (59N)

Pick-up value 1 – 60 %U0N (step 1%)

Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio: 0.97
Inaccuracy:
value
- Starting UoCalc (3LN mode) ±1 V
- Operate time ±1 % or ±150 ms
270 V50/en M/A018

Table 12.39: Zero sequence voltage stage U0>> (59N)

Pick-up value 1 – 60 %U0N (step 1%)

Reset time <95 ms
Reset ratio: 0.97
Inaccuracy:
value
- Starting U0Calc (3LN mode) ±1 V
NOTE: This is only available in voltage measurement mode U0.
12.3.5 Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF)

Table 12.40: Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF)
Relay to be supervised T1, T2, T3 and T4

Inaccuracy -
- Operating time ±100 ms
12.3.6 Magnetising inrush 68F2

Table 12.41: Magnetising inrush 68F2
Settings: -
- Pick-up value 10 – 100 % (step 1%)

Inaccuracy: -
NOTE: The amplitude of second harmonic content has to be at least 2% of the nominal
of CT. If the moninal current is 5 A, the 100 Hz component needs to exceed 100
mA.
V50/en M/A018 271

12.3.7 Over exicitation 68F5

Table 12.42: Over exicitation 68F5
Settings: -
- Setting range over exicitation 10 – 100 % (step 1%)

Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±2%- unit
NOTE: The amplitude of fifth harmonic content has to be at least 2% of the nominal of
CT. If the moninal current is 5 A, the 250 Hz component needs to exceed 100 mA.
12.3.8 Digital input / output card (option)

Table 12.43: Digital input / output card (option)
Number of digital inputs 4 (5)
External operating voltage Voltage selectable in order code (same as
DI nominal voltage for the relay):
1: 24 dc/ac (max 265 V)*
2: 110 dc/ac (max 265 V)*
3: 220 dc/ac (max 265 V)*

Current drain, when active Approx. 3 mA
Number of digital outputs (1)
Voltage withstand 265 V dc/ac
Continuous carry 5A
Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A
Make and carry 3 s 15 A

Breaking capacity. DC ( L/R = 40 ms) -
at 48 V dc: 1.0 A
at 110 V dc: 0.44 A
at 220 V dc: 0.22 A

Terminal block Maximum wire dimension:
Phoenix MVSTBW or equivalent 2.5 mm2 (13 – 14 awg)
* set dc/ac mode according to the used voltage in VAMPSET.
NOTE: Approximately 2 mA of current is going trough the T5 (X6:1 & X6:2) circuit even
when used as a digital output. This has to be noticed when T5 is used with certain
type of applications (if 2 mA is enough to control for example a breaker).
When DI/DO-option cards are ordered separately the threshold has to be modified
manually on field according the description in the manual (see Chapter 11.5
Input/output card B = 4 x DI + 1 x DI/DO).
272 V50/en M/A018

12.3.9 Arc fault protection (option)

1. 2S+BIO
The operation of the arc protection depends on the setting value of
the ArcI> and ArcI0> current limits.
The arc current limits cannot be set, unless the relay is provided with
the optional arc protection card.
Table 12.44: Arc protection stage ArcI> (50ARC), ArcI0> (50NARC)
Pick-up value 0.5 – 10.0 x IN
Arc sensor connection: S1, S2, S1/S2, BI, S1/BI, S2/BI, S1/S2/BI
- Operating time (Light only) 13 ms
- Operating time (4 x ISET + light) 17ms
- Operating time (BIN) 10 ms
- Operating time (Delayed Arc L>) 0.01 – 0.15 s
- BO operating time < 3 ms

Reset time <95 ms
Reset time (Delayed ARC L) <120 ms
Reset time (BO) < 85 ms
Reset ratio: 0.90
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting 10% of the set value
- Operating time ±5 ms
- Delayed ARC light ±10 ms
2. 3S+BIO
The operation of the arc protection depends on the setting value of
the I>int and I0>int current limits.
The arc current limits cannot be set, unless the relay is provided with
the optional arc protection card.
Table 12.45: Advanced arc protection stage
Pick-up value 0.5 – 10.0 x IN for I>
0.1 – 5.0 x IN for I0>

Arc sensor connection: S1, S2, S3, BI, GOOSE
- Operating time 7 ms
Inaccuracy: -
- Under nominal current 2.5% of nominal
- Over nominal current 2.5% of measurement
V50/en M/A018 273

12.4 Supporting functions 12 Technical data
12.4 Supporting functions

**) This is the instantaneous time i.e. the minimum total operational time including the
fault detection time and operation time of the trip contacts.
Table 12.46: Disturbance recorder (DR)

Mode of recording Saturated / Overflow
Sample rate:
- Waveform recording 32/cycle, 16/cycle, 8/cycle
- Trend curve recording 10, 20, 200 ms
1, 5, 10, 15, 30 s
1 min
Recording time (one record) 0.1 s – 12 000 min (According recorder set-
ting)
Pre-trigger rate 0 – 100%
Number of selected channels 0 – 12
The recording time and the number of records depend on the time setting and the
number of selected channels.
Table 12.47: Inrush current detection
Cold load settings: -
- Idle current 0.01 – 0.50 x IN
- Pickup current 0.30 – 10.00 x IN
- Maximum time 0.01** – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Inrush settings: -
- Pickup for 2nd harmonic 0 – 99 %
Table 12.48: Current transformer supervision

IMAX> setting 0.00 – 10.00 x IN (step 0.01)
IMIN< setting 0.00 – 10.00 x IN (step 0.01)

Definite time function: DT

Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio IMAX> 0.97
Reset ratio IMIN< 1.03

Inaccuracy: -
- Activation ±3% of the set value
274 V50/en M/A018

13 Mounting
13 Mounting
PANEL MOUNTING VAMP 50 SERIES
mm
in 158 128 213 80
6.22 5.04 8.39 3.15
Vamp 50 series
137 OK
171 186
5.39 6.73 7.32
F1 F2
9.0
82 0.35
1 3 3.23
9.0 5.0
0.2
0.35
9.5
0.37
series
Vamp 50
120 2
4.72
OK
F2
139
5.47
F1
series
Vamp 50
OK
1
0.0 .0-10 F1
F2
4-
0.3
9
>2
0
0.79
series
Vamp 50
series
Vamp 50
OK
F2
F1
OK
F2
F1
V50/en M/A018 275

13 Mounting
VAMP 50 SERIES (DEFAULT SIZE) WALL MOUNTING FRAME TYPE V50WAF
V50WAF
1
1a
Vamp 52
OK
1c F1
F2
2 1b
185
mm 7.28 32
in 1 21
32 1.26
4.76
1.26
OK
F2
F1
1 20
4.72
3 4
OK
F2
F1
OK
F2
F1
276 V50/en M/A018

14 Order information
When ordering, please state:
• Type designation:
• Quantity:
• Options (see respective ordering code):
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay

V50 - -
V52 Feeder and Motor Protection Relay
Relay type
= Default
Phase current inputs [A]

3 = 1A / 5A
Earth-fault current input [A]

A = 1A / 5A
B = 0.2A /1A
Nominal Supply Voltage [V]

A = Power A 48 - 230 V (40.. 265Vac/dc)
B = Power B 24 V (18.. 36Vdc)
mA output option
A = None
B = mA output
DI nominal activation voltage

1 = 24 Vdc / 110 Vac
2 = 110 Vdc / 220Vac
3 = 220 Vdc
Optional I/O extension modules

A = None
B = 4xDI + 1xDI/DO
C = Arc (2 x Arc sensor + BIO)
D = Advanced arc (3 x Arc sensor + BIO)
Optional communication module 1

A = None
D = Plastic/Plastic serial fibre interface
E = Glass/Glass serial fibre interface
F = Rx Plastic/Tx Glass serial fibre interface
G = Rx Glass/Tx Plastic serial fibre interface
K = RJ-45 10Mbps ethernet interface and RS-232
P = Profibus interface
R = 2 x ST 100Mbps ethernet fibre interface inc. IEC 61850 (*
S = 2 x RJ-45 100Mbps ethernet interface inc. IEC 61850
B = RS 485 interface (2-wire) with option for module 2
L = RS-232 remote port inteface and support for module 2
M = RS-232 remote port interface with IRIG B and extension port and support for module 2
Optional communication module 2

A = None
B = IRIG-B time syncronisation input (**
C = RTD interface (Glass fibre) (**
E = RJ-45 10Mbps ethernet interface inc. IEC 61850 (**
G = LC 100Mbps ethernet fibre interface inc. IEC 61850 (**
Note:
(* Supply voltage has to be 110 Vac/dc or more
(** Option available only with communication module 1: B, L and M
V50/en M/A018 277

Accessories
Order code Description Note
VX052-3 USB programming cable (VAMPSET) Cable length 3m
VX054-3 Interface cable to VPA 3 CG (Profibus module) for RS 232 Cable length 3m
VX044 Interface cable to VIO 12 (RTD module) Cable length 2 m
VSE001PP Fibre optic Interface Module (plastic - plastic) Max. distance 30 m
VSE001GG Fibre optic Interface Module (glass - glass) Max. distance 1 km
VSE001GP Fibre optic Interface Module (glass - plastic) Max. distance 1 km / 30 m
VSE001PG Fibre optic Interface Module (plastic - glass) Max. distance 30 m / 1 km
VSE002 RS485 Interface Module
VPA3CG External Profibus module To be used when ethernet
and profibus communication
needed. Always use connec-
tion cable type VX054-3 and
separate 12 V dc Auxuliary
power supply to feed energy
to VPA3CG. Read more in
VPA3CG User's manual.
VX054-3 Interface cable to VPA 3 CG (Profibus module) for RS 232 Cable length 3m
VIO 12 AA RTD Module, 12pcs RTD inputs, Optical Tx Communication (24-230
Vac/dc)
VIO 12 AB RTD Module, 12pcs RTD inputs, RS 485 Communication (24-230 Vac/dc)
VIO 12 AC RTD/mA Module, 12pcs RTD inputs, PTC, mA inputs/outputs, RS232,
RS485 and Optical Tx/Rx Communication (24 Vdc)
VIO 12 AD RTD/mA Module, 12pcs RTD inputs, PTC, mA inputs/outputs, RS232,
RS485 and Optical Tx/Rx Communication (48-230 Vac/dc)
VA 1 DA-6 Arc sensor Cable length 6 m
VA 1 DA-20 Arc sensor Cable length 20 m
V50WAF V50 wall assembly frame
278 V50/en M/A018

15 Firmware revision
10.52 First revision for the product
10.58 Two voltagemodes added: 2LL+Uo/LNy and 2LL+Uo/Lly
New features in IEC 61850 added
Outputs vef files with suomi & Russian language packets

10.65 3LN+Uo mode added
Ucommon (fundamental component) subtracted from other channels
Uf>, U1< and U1<< protection stages added

10.67 100 Mbps option card support
10.68 Default font sizes changed
Popup window added for language packet init

10.74 I> and I0> - I0>>>> -stages with faster operation time
10.87 Maximum rated power increased to 400000 kVA from 200000 kVA
Support for two instances of TCP protocols on Ethernet port
Virtual output events added
Ethernet/IP: mapping extensions (ExtDOs, ExtAOs and ExtAIs alarms)
“get/set” added to communication ports’ protocol lists
VTZsecondary VTysecondary added to scaling menu
Phasor diagrams added for synchrocheck
Autoreclose: automated CB selection

10.97 Autoreclose:
• when two CB's are used and both closed, AR is blocked
• start counter is not increased after manual CB close
5th harmonic blocking stage added

10.106 GOOSE supervision signals added
Automatic LED latch release added
Disturbance recorder full event added
Motor load current in per cent

10.108 Use of recorder memory in percents added
Various additions to IEC 61850

10.112 Autorecloser and programmable stages made available in VAMP 50
VAMP 52 / motor mode: Trip time of T> available also in seconds

10.115 Added "UNITS FOR MIMIC"
Increased number of TCP sockets (20 -> 22)
Logic outputs used in the logic configuration stays with the logic function they were first assigned
to when editing the configuration
V50/en M/A018 279

10.116 IP and other TCP parameters are able to change without reboot
Logic output numbering is not changed when changes are made in the logic
NOTE! Vampset version 2.2.97 required

10.118 Enable sending of analog data in GOOSE message
Day light saving (DST) rules added for system clock
HMI changes:
• Order of the first displays changed, 1.measurement, 2. mimic, 3. title
• timeout does not apply if the first 3 displays are active
10.122 Ethernet link and RSTP statuses displaying in VAMPSET
15 minute Maximum demand value to be shown on the MIMIC

10.123 Stages renamed:
• If2> = MAGNETISING INRUSH 68F2
• If5> = OVER EXCITATION 68F5
• P< = DIRECTIONAL POWER 32
• P<< = DIRECTIONAL POWER 32
10.128 Stages renamed: If2> = MAGNETISING INRUSH 68F2
Harmonic and waveform displays have real input channel names, not UA - UD
IEC 101 over Ethernet
ModbusTCP and ModbusSlv can be used simultaneously

10.134 Fast <30ms total operation time for I>>> stage
IEC 61850 File Transfer added
Difference of 2 signals compare mode in programmable stage added
280 V50/en M/A018

10.165 - FTP: Passive mode added
- Backup SNTP Server added
- New "Webset" web server added
- Logic: support for logic output events 17 – 20 added
- Modified: if relay ->SF relay (service status output), if relay addedto VAMPSET
- "F1" and "F2" to the "selected control" of function buttons added
- CBFP T3 & T4 monitoring fixed
- Possible to remove linked channels from disturbance recorder one by one added
- UDP mode for IEC 101 over ethernet added
- Support for folder view in VAMPSET added
- Default sample rate is now 32/cycle in disturbance recorder
- U>> minimum operation delay reduced from 0.08s to 0.06s
- U<<< & U>>> minimum operation delay reduced from 0.06s to 0.04s
- U<<< & U>>> operation delay setting step reduced from 0.02s to 0.01s
- U0>> minimum operation delay reduced from 0.3s to 0.08s
- U0>> operation delay setting step reduced from 0.1s to 0.02s
- U0>> release delay reduced from <250ms to <95ms
- Faulty phase detection for I0>, I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>> added
- Virtual inputs should have possibility take account R/L position
- Parameter for setting Inv time coefficient k added
- Default local port baud rate is fixed to 187500 bps on device with USB port
- Adjustable angle memory 0.2 – 3.2s added. The default duration 0.5s is the same as the previ-
ously fixed duration.
- 3S+1BI+BO: Labels and descriptions revised
- 3S+1BI+BO: Arc sensors added to the disturbance recorder
- 3S+1BI+BO: Trip relay 1 description editable
- 3S+1BI+BO: renamed to advanced arc protection
- Intermittent EF enhancement with adjustable operation delay
- Output relay's also editable, protection stage start/trip added to disturbance recorder
- VI1 – VI4 available in set group DI control
- Object 6 added to object block matrix
- P< and P<< protection stages removed
- Disturbance recorder size doubled from 256 kb to 512 kb
- Capacitor bank unbalance protection stage added
- Trip L1 – L3 event is now enabled by default
- TCPIP counters for received and sent packets added
- Events scroll order & event buffer clearing added to local panel conf in VAMPSET
- DST: improvement to automatic change
V50/en M/A018 281

- In use and dataset flags are easier edited in VAMPSET
- DNP3 & IEC-101: international temperature measurement added to analog Input list
- FUNCTION BUTTONS: F1 & F2 pulse length can be defined
- RELAYS: Object names should be editable
- RELAYS: programmable stage 3 coupling fixed
- RELAYS: programmable stages compare function fixed
- Programmable stage f measurement removed
- GOOSE: response time improvement
- IEC 61850: Delay characteristics support added
- IEC 61850 LED reset command added
- IEC 61850 LED status indication added
- IEC 61850 remote rebooting of the relay added
- IEC 61850: new LN to indicate the status and settings group of stage 50, 51, 50N, 51N, and 46
added
- IEC 61850: record fault currents by phase and I0
- IEC 61850: new LN PTRC to indicate A,B,C phase start and trip
- IEC 61850: object inactivity alarms added
- IEC 61850: phase indications from EF to PTRC added
- IEC 61850: new description OC/EF/OCb status/information LNs
- IEC 61850: LN STAT1GGIO1 includes I>>> Enable status/group information
- IEC 61850: new LN for EF trip indication EFPTRC2 including neut component
- IEC 61850: new LN containing indications from DR and remote triggering of DR
- IEC 61850: parameter IEC 61850 file transfer added
- IEC 61850: Event COMTRADE file ready added
- IEC 61850: new LNs with CT parameters added
- IEC 61850: default value for every GOOSE NI
- IEC 61850: GOOSE message can include quality attributes

10.175 Support to larger flash memory
Goose messages can include quality attributes
Object names editable
Programmable stage f measurement removed
Relay name can be 10 characters long
I>: Pick-up limit setting minimum value changed from 0.10 to 0.05
Number of setting groups increased from 2 to 4
When accept zero delay enabled, stages' definite operation delay can be set to 0
GOOSE operation speed improvement

20.101 Optional parameter to set zero delay for definite time protection stage
Io>>>>> with 30ms operation time
282 V50/en M/A018

20.103 IEC-61850: Multiple MAC addresses for GOOSE subscriber
N> & T> Estimated time to allow restart' added to MeasList (available in MIMIC and Local panel
measurement displays)
U0RMS scaled to phase voltage
SerNo label and description changed to VID
DeviceID label and description changed to s/n
IEC61850: Group switch LNs for Group 3/4 added
IEC61850: General trip information (all stages) in PTRC LN
IEC61850: Ethernet communication channels have LNs to indicate link down
Support for info field in logic
Function buttons, digital inputs and logic outputs' descriptions can be renamed. Renamed descrip-
tions appear also in logic.
20.104 Support for user configurable self diagnostic
Common set group information now available in MIMIC
V50/en M/A018 283

Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
© 2017 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier

92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00

Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com/vamp-protection Publishing: Schneider Electric

Publication version: V50/en M/A018 02/2017

Vamp 50, Vamp 52: VAMP 50 Overcurrent and Earthfault Protection Relay VAMP 52 Feeder and Motor Protection Relay

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vamp 50, Vamp 52: VAMP 50 Overcurrent and Earthfault Protection Relay VAMP 52 Feeder and Motor Protection Relay

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vamp 50, Vamp 52: VAMP 50 Overcurrent and Earthfault Protection Relay VAMP 52 Feeder and Motor Protection Relay

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VAMP 50, VAMP 52

VAMP 50 Overcurrent and earthfault protection relay

Publication version: V50/en M/A018

2 Local panel user interface ...................................................... 16

3 VAMPSET PC software ........................................................... 46

5 Protection functions ............................................................... 51

6 Supporting functions .............................................................. 130

6.10 Combined overcurrent status ...........................................157

7 Measurement functions .......................................................... 161

8 Control functions .................................................................... 178

9 Communication and protocols .............................................. 197

9.2.7 IEC 60870-5-101 ................................................. 213

12 Technical data ..........................................................................254

12.3.9 Arc fault protection (option) ................................. 273

13 Mounting .................................................................................. 275

14 Order information ....................................................................277

15 Firmware revision ....................................................................279

1.1 Legal notice

1.2 Safety information and password

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

1.3 Relay features

* Only VAMP 52 available when application option is in motor protection mode.

Further the relay includes a disturbance recorder. Arc protection is

The relay communicates with other systems using common protocols,

1.3.1 User interface

1.4 Related documents

*) xxxx = revision number

1.5 Periodical testing

1.6 EU directive compliance

Compliance with the European Commission's EMC Directive. Product

Compliance with the European Commission's Low Voltage Directive.

ISET Another name for pick up setting value I>

2 Local panel user interface

2.1 Relay front panel

Navigation push-button function

programmable function push-button. As default F1 toggles Virtual Input 1 (VI1) On/Off

programmable function push-button. As default F2 toggles Virtual Input 2 (VI2) On/Off

ENTER push-button for activating or confirming a function.

Adjusting LCD contrast

Figure 2.1: Sections of the LCD dot matrix display

1. Freely configurable single-line diagram

Figure 2.2: Sections of the LCD dot matrix display

1. Main menu column

2.1.2 Adjusting display contrast

2.2 Local panel operations

Main menu Submenus

Prot protection enabling

moving in the menus_relay

Figure 2.3: Moving in the menus using local HMI

• To move in the main menu, push or .

A list of the local main menu

Main menu Number of menus Description ANSI code Note

2. Recording files are read with VAMPSET

4. The menu is visible only if the stage is enabled.

5. Objects are circuit breakers, disconnectors etc.

7. Detailed protocol configuration is done with VAMPSET.

2.2.1 Menu structure of protection functions

Figure 2.4: First menu of I>> 50/51 stage

Figure 2.5: Second menu(next on the right) of I>> 50/51 stage